WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and ⁄ or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used
in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................88
4SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................107
5STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................153
6IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................215
7SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................244
8TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................283
9MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................289
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................366
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................369
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................................... 9
Essential Information.....................................................9
Symbols ..........................................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 9
CAMPERS.............................................................................10
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .............................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .............................11
KEYS ....................................................................................12
Key Fob........................................................................ 12
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .................................... 14
Vehicle On Message .................................................. 15
Depleted Key Fob Battery........................................... 16
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................16
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 16
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped........... 17
To Enter Remote Start Mode...................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ................................................................. 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle ... 17
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ......... 17
General Information.................................................... 18
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................18
Customer Key Programming ...................................... 18
Replacement Keys...................................................... 18
General Information.................................................... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED ..................19
To Arm The System .....................................................19
To Disarm The System ...............................................19
Rearming Of The System.............................................20
DOORS ................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...............................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped) ...21
Automatic Door Locks —If Equipped ..........................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....23
Front Door Removal.....................................................24
Rear Door Removal .....................................................26
SEATS...................................................................................27
Manual Front Seats.....................................................27
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................29
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................29
Rear Seat Stadium Position........................................31
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ...............................31
HEAD RESTRAINTS............................................................. 31
Front Head Restraints .................................................32
Rear Head Restraints..................................................32
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................33
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................33
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped........................33
MIRRORS .............................................................................34
Inside Day/Night Mirror —If Equipped........................34
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .................34
Outside Mirrors ...........................................................35
Power Mirrors — If Equipped.......................................35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................................35
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..........................................35
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 36
Headlight Switch.......................................................... 36
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —If Equipped .......... 36
High/Low Beam Switch............................................... 36
Flash-To-Pass............................................................... 36
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 36
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped................................... 37
Turn Signals................................................................. 37
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 37
Lights-On Reminder..................................................... 37
Bed Lights — If Equipped ............................................ 37
INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 38
Courtesy Lights............................................................ 38
Dimmer Controls ......................................................... 38
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS........................... 38
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 39
CLIMATE CONTROLS.......................................................... 39
Manual Climate Control Overview.............................. 39
Automatic Climate Controls Overview........................ 43
Climate Control Functions .......................................... 47
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped................................................................... 47
Operating Tips ............................................................ 48
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 49
Auto-Down Feature ..................................................... 49
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped.............. 49
Window Lockout Switch.............................................. 49
Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 50
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
GLADIATOR TOPS ..............................................................50
Provided Tools............................................................. 50
Lowering The Soft Top ................................................ 50
Raising The Soft Top................................................... 57
Removing The Soft Top............................................... 59
Installing The Soft Top ................................................ 60
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal.............................. 62
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation.......................... 65
Removing The Hard Top ............................................. 65
Installing The Hard Top............................................... 67
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP .........67
Door Frame Removal.................................................. 67
Door Frame Installation.............................................. 68
FOLDING WINDSHIELD .....................................................69
Lowering The Windshield............................................ 69
Raising The Windshield .............................................. 71
HOOD....................................................................................71
Opening The Hood ...................................................... 71
Closing The Hood ........................................................ 72
TAILGATE..............................................................................72
Opening........................................................................ 72
Three-Position Tailgate ............................................... 72
Closing ......................................................................... 73
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................73
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®............ 74
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 75
Using HomeLink®....................................................... 76
Security........................................................................ 76
Troubleshooting Tips .................................................. 76
General Information.................................................... 76
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................................................... 77
Storage .........................................................................77
Electrical Power Outlets ..............................................79
Power Inverters — If Equipped ...................................80
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ...............................81
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............... 83
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ....................................83
Tonneau Cover Installation .........................................84
Tonneau Cover Removal.............................................85
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...........................87
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................................88
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................................90
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .....................................90
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls....91
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped .......................................92
Off Road + Display — If Equipped ...............................92
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items ............92
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ....................93
Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode Message,
And Electrical Load Reduction Actions
(If Equipped).................................................................95
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................96
Red Warning Lights .....................................................97
Yellow Warning Lights .................................................99
Yellow Indicator Lights ............................................. 102
Green Indicator Lights.............................................. 103
White Indicator Lights............................................... 104
Blue Indicator Lights................................................. 105
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...................105
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ...............................................105
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................................106
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................107
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................107
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................108
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................114
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ...........114
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
If Equipped.................................................................117
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............119
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................123
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................123
Important Safety Precautions...................................123
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................124
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................129
Child Restraints .........................................................141
Transporting Pets .....................................................150
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................150
Transporting Passengers ..........................................150
Exhaust Gas ..............................................................151
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .......................................................................151
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ................................................................152
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................................. 153
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......................153
Automatic Transmission —If Equipped ................... 153
Normal Starting......................................................... 153
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .....155
If Engine Fails To Start.............................................. 155
After Starting ............................................................. 155
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 155
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..................... 156
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................. 156
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED.................... 157
Shifting.......................................................................158
Downshifting.............................................................. 158
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —IF EQUIPPED ............... 159
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................160
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .......... 160
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission ................... 160
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ............................... 164
Four-Position Transfer Case ..................................... 164
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ............................ 165
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear — If Equipped . 166
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only —If Equipped ........... 166
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped ...... 167
Off Road+ — If Equipped........................................... 167
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.................... 168
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) ................................................................. 169
Automatic Mode........................................................ 169
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop ....170
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 170
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 170
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 171
System Malfunction.................................................. 171
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 171
Automatic Mode........................................................ 171
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop ....172
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 172
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 172
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 173
System Malfunction.................................................. 173
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ................................. 173
To Activate................................................................. 173
To Set A Desired Speed............................................ 174
To Vary The Speed Setting ....................................... 174
To Accelerate For Passing ....................................... 174
To Resume Speed ................................................... 175
To Deactivate ........................................................... 175
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................175
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation.................176
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................176
To Activate/Deactivate..............................................177
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................................177
To Cancel ...................................................................178
To Turn Off .................................................................178
To Resume.................................................................178
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................................178
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ....................179
Overtake Aid ..............................................................180
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)....................................................180
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........................181
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........................181
Precautions While Driving With ACC ........................182
General Information..................................................184
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ............184
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —IF EQUIPPED........186
ParkSense Sensors...................................................186
ParkSense Warning Display......................................186
ParkSense Display ....................................................186
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense..........................189
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System ...189
Cleaning The ParkSense System .............................189
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....................189
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 190
ParkSense Sensors................................................... 190
ParkSense Warning Display ..................................... 190
ParkSense Display .................................................... 190
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.......................... 193
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System............ 193
Cleaning The ParkSense System ............................. 193
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 193
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........................... 194
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 196
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .............................................. 197
Fuel Filler Cap ........................................................... 197
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............................... 198
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................................... 198
Certification Label..................................................... 198
TRAILER TOWING ............................................................ 199
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 199
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................201
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)......................................................... 201
Trailer And Tongue Weight ....................................... 203
Towing Tips................................................................205
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)..206
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .......... 206
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models... 207
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 208
On-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 208
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 215
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................. 215
General Information ................................................. 218
BULB REPLACEMENT ..................................................... 219
Replacement Bulbs .................................................. 219
Bulb Replacement.................................................... 220
FUSES ............................................................................... 222
General Information ................................................. 222
Power Distribution Center (PDC).............................. 223
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...................................... 229
Jack Location ........................................................... 230
Spare Tire Removal ................................................. 231
Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 232
Jacking Instructions.................................................. 233
To Stow The Flat Or Spare........................................ 235
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools .............................. 236
JUMP STARTING ............................................................. 236
Preparations For Jump Start.................................... 236
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 238
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 239
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............................................... 239
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......................................... 240
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE...................................... 241
Four–Wheel Drive Models........................................ 242
Without The Key Fob ................................................ 242
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .................... 242
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 243
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)..................................... 243
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................................244
Maintenance Plan .....................................................245
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ................................248
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................................249
3.6L Engine ...............................................................249
Checking Oil Level ....................................................250
Adding Washer Fluid .................................................250
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................................250
Pressure Washing .....................................................251
DEALER SERVICE ............................................................251
Engine Oil ..................................................................251
Engine Oil Filter .........................................................252
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ..........................................252
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............................253
Air Conditioner Maintenance....................................254
Body Lubrication........................................................255
Windshield Wiper Blades..........................................255
Exhaust System ........................................................257
Cooling System..........................................................257
Brake System ...........................................................260
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................260
Transfer Case ...........................................................261
Manual Transmission — If Equipped........................261
Automatic Transmission —If Equipped ....................261
RAISING THE VEHICLE .....................................................262
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TIRES ................................................................................. 263
Tire Safety Information............................................. 263
Tires — General Information..................................... 269
Tire Types................................................................... 272
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel .......................................................... 273
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................................... 273
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ........................... 274
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 274
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ........................................................... 275
Treadwear.................................................................. 275
Traction Grades......................................................... 275
Temperature Grades................................................. 275
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 276
BODYWORK ...................................................................... 277
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................277
Body And Underbody Maintenance ......................... 277
Preserving The Bodywork ......................................... 277
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 279
Carpet Safety Information ........................................ 279
Carpet Removal......................................................... 280
Seats And Fabric Parts ............................................. 281
Plastic And Coated Parts .......................................... 282
Leather Parts............................................................. 282
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 282
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ............................. 283
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 283
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 283
Torque Specifications............................................... 283
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 284
3.6L Engine............................................................... 284
Reformulated Gasoline ........................................... 284
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 284
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .................................... 284
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ............ 284
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 285
MMT In Gasoline....................................................... 285
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 285
Carbon Monoxide Warnings..................................... 285
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 286
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.............................................. 287
Engine ....................................................................... 287
Chassis ..................................................................... 288
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................................289
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................................289
UCONNECT SETTINGS ......................................................290
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings..................................................290
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings..................................................300
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings.............................310
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .........................321
Safety Guidelines ......................................................321
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY.............................322
Introduction ...............................................................322
Radio Mode ...............................................................322
Media Mode...............................................................325
Phone Mode ..............................................................326
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ............................ 331
Introduction ............................................................... 331
Radio Mode ............................................................... 332
Media Mode .............................................................. 338
Phone Mode .............................................................. 343
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 351
Off-Road Pages Status Bar....................................... 352
Pitch & Roll................................................................ 352
Drivetrain................................................................... 352
Accessory Gauge....................................................... 353
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......................... 353
Radio Operation ........................................................ 353
Media Mode .............................................................. 353
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL............................................... 354
Jeep® Wireless Speaker -
If Equipped ................................................................ 355
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 359
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 359
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ............. 360
Introducing Uconnect ............................................... 360
Get Started................................................................ 361
Basic Voice Commands............................................ 361
Radio ......................................................................... 361
Media......................................................................... 362
Phone ........................................................................ 362
Voice Text Reply........................................................ 362
Climate — If Equipped .............................................. 363
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped ......................... 363
Siri® Eyes Free ......................................................... 363
Using Do Not Disturb ............................................... 363
Android Auto™ — If Equipped .................................. 364
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ................................ 364
General Information ................................................. 365
Additional Information.............................................. 365
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ............................................................................366
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................366
Prepare A List ............................................................366
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................366
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................366
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................366
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................366
In Mexico Contact......................................................366
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........................367
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired(TDD/TTY)....................................................367
Service Contract .......................................................367
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................367
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................367
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................368
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........368
In Canada...................................................................368
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................368
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers,
the vehicle’s warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving
your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information that may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All information contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best
possible way. FCA US LLC aims towards a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical
and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION
Consult the Table of Contents at the front of this Owner’s Manual to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered,
certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
SYMBOLS
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
1
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
CAMPERS
This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in camper applications.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains
WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury, and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect
touchscreen, press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there,
press the
Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User Guide
Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the
vehicle is moving. If you try to access the features while
the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: “Feature
not available while the vehicle is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it is never out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
Topics can be added to your “Favorites” for easy access in
the future. Refer to “Multimedia” for more information.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Keyless Enter-N-Go and
a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system consists of a key fob with a
mechanical key and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
tailgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m).
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position and with the
vehicle doors open, the lock button will be disabled, and
only the unlock button will be enabled. All RKE commands
will be disabled once the vehicle begins moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h) or above.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock
the driver's door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and
tailgate. This setting is adjustable through the Uconnect
Settings. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights will
flash twice.
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the
doors, tailgate, glove compartment, storage compart-
ments (if equipped), and rear seatbacks.
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp
once to acknowledge the lock signal. The turn signal flash
and horn chirp when locking the doors can be turned on/
off. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button
6 — Lock Button
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with the
key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes
and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may be
damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong electrical
shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the
electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing
the key fob to direct sunlight.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you are in the
vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm system
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock
button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 2 mph (4 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indicated
on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the fob LED will no
longer illuminate with a button push.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
1. Remove the back cover of the key fob by inserting a
flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of
the fob. Apply light pressure until the cover unsnaps
being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed
counter-clockwise (in the order shown below) to
loosen the remaining snaps until the battery cover
can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot
and sliding the battery forward and upward being
careful not to damage the electronic board
underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure
the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery
until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly
aligned before snapping it back in place.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely, stop
using the product and keep it away from children.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once
a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a START/STOP ignition button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob may have
a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side of the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. automatic locking, alarm,
etc.) are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating"
for further information.
VEHICLE ON MESSAGE
While opening the driver's door when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime will sound
to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In
addition to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or
Accessory On” in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
timing for this feature is programmable.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in
the OFF position, and remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DEPLETED KEY FOB BATTERY
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED
light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu-
minates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control System, heated seats (if equipped), and heated
steering wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40°F
(4.4°C). Refer to “Seats” and “Steering Wheel” in this
chapter for further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push the Remote Start button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be manually started with a push of
the START/STOP ignition button after two consecutive
time outs.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or
exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and tailgate
will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will
chirp twice (if “Sound Horn With Remote Start” is selected
within Uconnect Settings). Then the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
W
ITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or
allow the remote start cycle to complete the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable
for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start
request.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND
D
RIVE THE VEHICLE
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release
the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or
unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, press the brake pedal and push and
release the START/STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Controls may
activate the heated seats (if equipped) and heated
steering wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40°F
(4.4°C). These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb
check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine
but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine
will start and shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
CUSTOMER KEY PROGRAMMING
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
REPLACEMENT KEYS
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once
a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended to
prevent theft and/or damage.
Always remember to cycle the ignition to OFF to
prevent battery drainage.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle
Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm
will provide the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will
flash, and the vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting
And Operating" for further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter for further
information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock door handle (if
equipped). Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter for further information.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push
the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the
door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, and storage
compartments (if equipped).
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the doors, and
rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in
the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and tailgate without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates Headlight Illumination
On Approach (low beams, license plate lamp, parking
lights) for whichever time duration is set within the
Uconnect Settings between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver's door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depending on
the selected setting in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all doors and the tailgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle
is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock pref-
erence setting.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in
the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob
In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the vehicle
will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry is
disabled using the Uconnect system, the key protection
described in this section remains active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe
operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
When pushing the door handle lock button, DO NOT grab
the door handle. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, the driver must
wait three seconds before locking or unlocking the
doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow the driver to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System,
the key protection described in “Preventing Inadvertent
Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle” remains
active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer
for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, temporarily
remove the sealing plug for access, and use a flat blade
screwdriver (or mechanical key) to rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After engaging or disengaging the Child-Protection
Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged (locked).
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted
on the doors. If you choose to remove
the doors, see an authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside
mirror. Federal law requires outside
mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
When front doors are removed, the message “Blind Spot
Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in the
instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power Door
Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin
located under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the
instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along
the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are
detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may cause personal injury in the event of an
accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). Refer to
“Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the
wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into the
open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull downward on the
wiring connector to unplug. Unhook the wire harness
strap from the hook on the bodyside door opening.
Store the wiring connector in the lower door basket of
the door.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the check
bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
re-installation.
Door Check Arm
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
When reinstalling the door check arm attachment bolt,
bolt torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb / 16 N·m and
27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiring Harness Lever
1 — Wiring Harness Lever
2 — Black Security Tab
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to
prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from
the upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin
under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may cause personal injury in the event of an
accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). Refer to
“Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This
will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring
connector to be unplugged. Unhook the wire harness strap
from the hook on the bodyside door opening. Store the
wire connector into the lower basket of the door.
Wiring Connector
6. With the door in the open position, remove the check
bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
reinstallation.
Door Check Arm
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
When reinstalling the check arm attachment bolt, bolt
torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb / 16 N·m and
27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
MANUAL FRONT SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). Refer to
“Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment Bar Location
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Front Seatback Recline
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or rearward, depending on the direction you would
like the seatback to move. Release the strap when the
desired position is reached and the seatback will lock into
place.
Recline Strap
Lumbar Support
The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on the
outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control
forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Knob
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The Heated Seat Control Buttons are located on the center
instrument panel below the touchscreen and also in the
Climate Control touchscreen menu.
Heated Seat Control Buttons
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be folded flat to
access the storage area behind the seat. The seat bottom
can also be lifted into the Stadium Position to create more
storage space on the rear floor, and provide access to the
underseat storage bins (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Seat
Stadium Position” in this section for more information.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
The center head restraints must be in the lowest posi-
tion to avoid contact with the center console when
folding the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
Seatback is not intended to be used for storing cargo
when folded flat. Seatback only folds to allow access to
the cargo area behind the seat. Vehicle should not be
operated with unsecured cargo on the second row
folded seatback.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding The Rear Seats
To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap located
on the upper outboard side of the rear seat to release the
seat. The head restraints are folded independently. Refer
to “Head Restraints” in this chapter for further
information.
NOTE:
Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright position
using the vehicle key. Each seatback must be unlocked to
release for folding.
Release Strap Locations
Rear Seat Folded Flat
To raise the seatback to the proper position, manually lift
the seatback until it locks into place. To return the head
restraint to the proper position, manually lift up until it
locks into place. If interference from the cargo area behind
the seat prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will
have difficulty returning the seats to their proper position.
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with stow clips located on the
lower trim, next to the rear seats. Use these clips to
hold the seat belt out of the path of the seat back when
it is being folded and raised.
Stow Clip Location
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
opening the seats to the open position, the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape over time.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. Perform a “push - pull - push” check to confirm
the seat is fully locked. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. A red
indicator on the pull strap will be displayed if the
seatback is not securely locked. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
REAR SEAT STADIUM POSITION
The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward into the
Stadium Position to create more storage space on the
vehicle’s floor, and to access the under seat storage bins
(if equipped).
To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:
1. Lift upward on each section of the seat bottom.
Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)
2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the Stadium
Position.
Stadium Position
To return the seat bottom to the normal position, push
downward on the raised seat bottom.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear
armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap
under the head restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go,
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To fold down the outboard head restraints, push the
button located on the outboard side of the head restraint.
Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust it to the
appropriate height using the adjustment button. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information
on child seat tether routing.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat down.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
The Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column feature allows the
steering column to tilt upward or downward, and lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The Tilt/Telescoping lever
is located on the steering column, below the turn signal
lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the Tilt/Telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the Tilt/
Telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that will
warm the steering wheel in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on
until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Inside Day/Night Mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from other vehicles can be reduced by
moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic Dimming Mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from
other vehicles.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature defaults to on at every
ignition cycle, and can be turned on or off through the
Uconnect “Controls” button on the touchscreen.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The Outside Mirrors are located on the front driver and
passenger side doors, and are adjusted manually or by
power adjustment (if equipped).
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside Mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Control Switch
The Power Mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the Power Mirror Control Switch, push any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN position
to adjust the power mirrors.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The Heated Mirrors feature helps to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated whenever
the rear window defroster (if equipped) is
activated. Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
further information.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
The Illuminated Vanity Mirrors are located on the sun
visors. To use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel lights, instrument panel light
dimming, interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light
operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated
position below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active
when the low beams are not on while the vehicle’s
transmission is in any position (Automatic Transmission),
or when the vehicle begins to move (Manual
Transmission).
NOTE:
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deac-
tivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the vehicle (when
a turn signal is activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
The High/Low Beam Switch is located within the
Multifunction Lever on the left side of the steering wheel.
High beam headlights can be used for improved visibility
in low lit areas when there is no oncoming traffic.
Otherwise, it is recommended to use the low beam
headlights to reduce glare to other vehicles.
With the headlight switch activated, push the
Multifunction Lever toward the instrument panel to switch
the headlights to high beams. The lever will return to the
centered position. To return the headlights to low beam,
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the lever
toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
FLASH-TO-PASS
The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the high beam
headlights temporarily to signal another vehicle of a
passing occurrence. Pull and hold the Multifunction Lever
to activate the Flash-To-Pass feature. When the lever is
released, the Flash-To-Pass feature will deactivate.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Headlight System will turn the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds (programmable through the Uconnect settings)
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Push Cargo Light
5 — Push Front Fog Light
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information on the headlight delay timing.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of the vehicle
below the headlights. When activated, these lights add
illumination directed at the driving surface to aid in poor
visibility conditions.
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking lights
or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch.
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Lane Change Assist feature will flash the turn signal
(left or right) three times to indicate to other drivers that
you are changing lanes. Tap the multifunction lever up or
down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the
turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
The Lights-On Reminder feature will identify if the
headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. A chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened reminding the operator to turn the
headlight switch off.
BED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo area. Bed
lights are turned on by pushing the bed light switch
located on the lower half of the headlight switch.
Bed Light Switch
A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display
when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second
time will turn the lights off.
The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60 seconds
when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the instrument panel
dimmer control (dial on the right) on the headlight switch
fully upward while the doors are closed, or if equipped,
when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the center of the
vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light
and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Interior Courtesy Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off.
This is also known as “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and
are located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control
will adjust the ambient light levels below the instrument
panel, near the floor.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column; it operates the
multiple wiper options. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Front Wiper Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first
detent position for one of four intermittent settings. The
delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold until
desired spray is reached. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wipers will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will
operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will
turn off.
Mist Feature
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off-road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long
as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Manual Climate Controls
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and
the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button — If Equipped
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Heater Only
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as you turn the temperature
control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases the heating temperature and turning the temperature control knob counterclockwise
decreases the heating temperature.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The blower speeds increase
as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the Defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the blower control knob to the OFF (o) position.
Icon Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS
O
VERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates
when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Faceplate AUTO Button
Touchscreen AUTO Button
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button
on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic mode.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting
to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Icon Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases
as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen or press the Mode button on the faceplate to adjust the airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Faceplate OFF Button
Touchscreen OFF Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If A/C performance seems lower than expected, check
the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the
radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean
with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-program-
mable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air, with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control System filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
, on, and blower on
high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set the
mode control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
and turn on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
the position. If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to the position.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power windows feature allows for movement of the
windows with the push of a button. The power window
switches are located on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the
window and pull upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window. The
bottom left switch controls the left rear window and the
bottom right switch controls the right rear window.
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
There are window switches located on the rear of the
center console for the rear passenger windows.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the front
passenger door power window switch have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch down, past the detent,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly, without going past the detent, and release it
when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
To open the rear sliding window, push the release button
inward while sliding the window into the open position.
Release Button Location
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The window lockout switch allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, rotate the switch downward. To
enable the window controls, rotate the switch upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by
adjusting the window opening.
GLADIATOR TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the
necessary tools required for the operations described in
the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for
easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used inde-
pendently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at the same time.
Provided Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top
system will be provided in a separate box located in the
bed of the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
WARNING!
The fabric quarter panel cover assemblies, rear
window, and fabric top are designed only for protec-
tion against the elements. Do not rely on them to
contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident. Remember, always
wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft top. The
side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or
hands get caught in-between.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
(Continued)
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult
to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the
vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed.
If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle
and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in
“Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information. It contains important informa-
tion on cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric
top.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew on the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION!
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Side View Top And Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — Quarter Panel Upper Hook And Loop
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Rear Window Vertical Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
5 — #5 Bow
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rear Window View And Components
1 — Top Retainer 4 — Pull Tabs
2 — Left Vertical Retainer 5 — Lower Center Retainer
3 — Lower Retainers 6 — Right Vertical Retainer
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider® Position:
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fold both sun visors forward
against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from
the crossbar by pulling the handle
downward. Make sure the hook is
fully disengaged from its receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1
Bow of the soft top to begin the operation. It is
recommended to utilize two people for this
procedure.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link
to fold the soft top rearward.
Step Four
5. Secure the top in this position by using the two
hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the center
console.
Step Five
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® Position with
the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies fully
installed or completely removed.
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window must
be either all in or all out.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Removing The Rear Window And Quarter
Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window
must
ALL be removed together, or installed together.
1. Start by removing the rear window first. Use the two
straps located on the bottom of each side of the rear
window to remove the right and left vertical
retainers, as well as the lower center retainer.
Step One (Right Side Shown)
Step One
2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it outward
in either direction until it is completely separate from
its retainer.
Do not pull downward while removing the
rear window. Damage to the retainer could result.
Store the rear window in the soft top rear window
storage bag (if equipped), or in a safe location. Refer
to “Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag — If Equipped”
in this section for further information.
Step Two
3. After removing the rear window, remove the quarter
panel cover assemblies starting with either side.
Disengage the quarter panel cover assembly from the
bottom by pulling the fabric at the bottom upward.
4. With two hands, grasp the front of the quarter panel
cover assembly and pull outward to disengage it from
its retainer on the door frame.
Step Four
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull the quarter panel cover assembly up and out
from the bottom, then pull it down and away from the
vehicle to remove.
Step Five
6. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter panel
cover assembly. Store the assemblies in the soft top
rear window storage bag (if equipped), or a safe
location.
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, proceed as
follows:
1. With the bag opened completely, fold the fabric
divider downward and lay the rear window in the
bottom of the bag.
Step One
2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear window.
Step Two
3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly all the way
to the right side and the second quarter panel cover
assembly on the left side. Secure both using the two
hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.
NOTE:
The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked “1” and
“2” on the inside of the panel assembly.
Step Three
4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Step Four
1 — Left Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
2 — Right Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. From the Sunrider® Position,
remove straps if previously
secured.
Step One
2. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward
the front of the vehicle, manually guiding the top into
the closed position.
Step Two
Step Two
3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Step Three
4. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Four
5. Repeat steps three and four on the other side.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Rear Window And Quarter
Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window
must
ALL be removed together, or installed together.
If the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies
were previously removed, proceed as follows to install:
1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover assembly
up into the retainer.
Step One
2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of the cover
assembly (toward the front of the vehicle) starting at
the top, and working downward.
Step Two
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged before the
vehicle resumes motion.
3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front
corner of each quarter panel cover assembly by
pressing firmly.
Step Three
4. From either side, guide the rear window into the
retainer while keeping the window level.
Step Four
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all quarter panel cover assembly and
rear window install steps could result in damage to the
Soft Top or vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
5. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the rear
window beginning on the left side of the vehicle and
working toward the center. Then, move to the right
side of the vehicle and continue from the center,
working to the right until the rear window is secured
in the lower retainer.
Step Five
6. Engage the vertical retainers up the right and left side
of the rear window.
Step Six
7. Tuck the rear window under the soft top fabric and
press firmly.
Step Seven
8. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right
and left corners.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top to the
Sunrider® position. Refer to
“Lowering The Soft Top” in this
section.
2. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head fasteners on the
inside of each top mechanism.
Step Two
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window must
be either all in or all out.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away from
the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport bar
and trim. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry
location.
4. Remove the door frames. The rear door frames must
be removed before the front door frames. Refer to
“Door Frame” in this chapter for removal instructions.
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head fasteners on both
rear corners and the back of the cab, then remove the
belt rail.
NOTE:
Folding down the rear seats is recommended to provide
easier access to the fasteners.
Step Five
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
NOTE:
If installing the soft top immediately after removing the
hard top, ensure the wire harness is stored properly, and
not tucked under the belt rail. Refer to “Removing The
Hard Top” in this section for instructions on disconnecting
and storing the wire harness.
1. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle. Secure
the belt rail using the six fasteners with the provided
#T50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the
table below for recommended torque specifications.
Step One
2. Install the door frames. Start with both front doors,
followed by both rear doors. Refer to “Door Frame” in
this chapter for instructions and appropriate torque
specifications for the door frame Torx head fasteners.
1 — Rear Fasteners
2 — Corner Fasteners
Torque
Specification For
Torx Fastener
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lbs
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lbs
(12.0 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
1 — Rear Fasteners
2 — Corner Fasteners
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
3. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This bag should
be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover
for shipping only.
4. Ensure the top is secured with the provided
hook-and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft top onto
the rear of the cab. Line up the locater pins (one on
each side of the soft top) with the rear door frames.
Step Four
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, install and tighten the Torx fasteners by
turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications. Repeat on the
opposite side.
Step Five
Step Five
Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lbs
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lbs
(12.0 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the
Sunrider® position, ensure the top is secured with
the provided hook-and-loop fasteners. For
instructions on how to raise the soft top, refer to
“Raising The Soft Top” in this section.
Step Six
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires,
building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.
For information on optional Mopar® accessory roof
racks, refer to “Roof Luggage Rack” in this section.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side, or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door,
or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Hard Top Components
NOTE:
The left side panel must be removed before removing the right side panel.
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking
them from the roof.
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the
top of the windshield.
Step Three
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag —
If Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to store
your hard top panels. The storage bag contains two
compartments.
Lay the bag for the panels down so the loops and hooks
are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting
the panel into the panels bag.
There is a pouch located on the front of the bag to store
the provided hard top edge protectors that are used
when the hard top is not installed on the vehicle.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting the
panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag closed.
Step Four
5. Store the Freedom Top panels bag in a safe location.
1 — Rear Panel Lock
2 — Front Panel Lock
3 — Outside Panel Lock
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Header Panel Unlatched
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
I
NSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with
the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole,
followed by the left side panel, making sure there is
no overhang. Make sure that the panels are sitting
flush with the body.
2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clear of any dust and debris prior to reinstal-
lation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Hard Top Front
Panel(s) Removal” in this section for removal
instructions.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,
remove the two Torx head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front
doors).
Step Three
4. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft trim panel
(attached by the hook-and-loop fastener) by pulling
the panel away from the trim.
Step Four
5. Remove the Torx head fasteners that secure the hard
top to the vehicle: two along the interior bodyside,
rearward of the back doors, followed by the four
fasteners along the back of the vehicle cab using the
#T50 Torx head driver.
Step Five
6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner
of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove the
plastic cover by pushing the cover to the side, and
sliding it off.
1 — Bodyside Torx Head Fasteners
2 — Vehicle Cab Torx Head Fasteners
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
Step Six
7. To release the wire harness, pull back on the red latch
(1), then push down on the black button (2) while
pulling the harness out.
Step Seven
8. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install the
provided edge protectors along the bottom edges of
the hard top, and place the hard top on a soft surface
to prevent damage.
9. Store the wire harness by removing the storage cover
on the quarter trim. Use the mechanical key blade to
pry the cover open.
Step Nine
10. Tuck the wire harness inside the storage
compartment, and replace the cover.
Step Ten
1 — Red Latch
2 — Black Button
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Freedom Top.
CAUTION!
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires,
building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc. For
optional Mopar® accessory roof racks, refer to “Roof
Luggage Rack” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
bodyside, or fully removed.
The removal of the hard top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the hard top.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they
must be removed prior to installation of the hard top.
Refer to “Door Frame” in this chapter for removal
procedures.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and across the back. Then follow the removal
steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in
reverse order.
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:
Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an
even gap on both sides.
Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners
to ensure they are properly secured.
The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard top to the
body should be torqued to 155 in-lb +/- 22 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx
head driver and ratchet.
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
The rear door frames must be removed first, followed by
the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx head fasteners located on
the underside of each door hinge (two per door), and
remove the fasteners by pulling downward.
Step One
NOTE:
The fasteners will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by design.
Step One
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is
wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
Step Two
3. Store the fasteners in a secure location.
4. Repeat the procedure on the front door frame.
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION
1. Install the front door frame first.
2. Ensure the windshield is in the “up” position.
Carefully place the front door frame in the rubber seal
at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for
the Torx head fasteners (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the door
frame, and insert the fasteners from underneath.
Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
Step Three
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the
body side, just behind the rear door opening.
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear belt rail and the rear of the front door frame,
making sure the rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the seals
are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Step Five
Step Five
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door
and/or door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
Target Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
8.8 ft-lbs
(12 N·m)
11.0 ft-lbs
(15 N·m)
3.6 ft-lbs (5 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
6. Insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with
the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten. Refer to the previous table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide protection in some accidents.
The windshield also provides protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and other
objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
provides.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be
folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its
removal is completed and before you return to on-road
driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat
belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of
whether the windshield is raised or folded down.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the steps below:
If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, the top
MUST be lowered, and the door frames must be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, the
Freedom Panels
MUST be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
Refer to the “Soft Top,” “Door Frame,” and
“Freedom Top” instructions in this chapter for
more information.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against
personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all
times when the windshield is down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for
raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding
windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and
tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle
from providing you and your passengers’ protection
in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the
vehicle’s header seal.
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, remove
the four Torx head fasteners located along the
interior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim).
Step Five
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded
holes and tighten for safekeeping, or in the fastener bin
located below the rear seat.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down bumpers on either side of the
hood and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap
to secure the windshield in place.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover that
is to be used whenever the windshield is folded down in
order to protect the ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover,
follow the instructions below:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers
the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
Protective Cover Installed
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the wind-
shield to the normal position. Store the cover in the cargo
area.
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could
result.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a
microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and
inside cover, being careful not to damage or scratch the
module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, reinstall
the four Torx head fasteners located along the
interior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim). Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten.
Step Three
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the
blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while holding
the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and
tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten.
Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex
bolts and push gently until they snap into place.
Step Five
NOTE:
Make sure the windshield is raised prior to installing the
tops.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Release both the hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
right side to open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch.
Remove support rod from the hood, and insert into the
radiator crossmember.
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the
radiator crossmember, and install into the clip on the
hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches.
TAILGATE
OPENING
Tailgate Release Handle
To open the tailgate, pull the release handle located on
the center of the tailgate and guide it to the lowered
position.
The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower, more
controlled lowering.
THREE-POSITION TAILGATE
The vehicle’s tailgate can be set to three positions: open,
mid, or closed. The mid position can be used to provide a
loading surface for transporting sheet goods.
To use the mid position, open the tailgate and lower it to
near mid position.
Tailgate In Mid Position
Secure the tailgate in this position by looping the tailgate
straps behind the circular retainer on both sides.
Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer
Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated behind the
circular retainer against the sides of the sheet metal.
Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap
When hauling cargo using the mid position and the tail-
gate, you
must support the load at two forward loca-
tions:
At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1)
Between the wheelhouse and the tailgate (2)
Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box
NOTE:
Failure to support the load at these two forward locations
could result in damage.
Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide support at
locations (1) and (2). Each board will need to be cut to
fit inside the pickup box.
The support at location (1) should be seated in the
dedicated formation on top of the wheelhouses.
The support at location (2) should use the remaining
two 2x4s. Stack the boards and place them into the
formation in the side wall of the pickup box. The
corners of the bottom board will need to be chamfered
to fit.
NOTE:
All cargo transported in the pickup box
must be
secured.
The maximum payload for the mid position is
500 lbs (226 kg).
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides latch into
place.
NOTE:
If the tonneau cover is installed, make sure the tonneau
cover is fully closed before closing the tailgate.
Due to the presence of the Center High-Mounted Stop
Light, removal of the tailgate is not recommended.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door openers,
motorized gates, lighting or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sun visor or the
overhead console, designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons
1 — Support Location 1
2 — Support Location 2
CAUTION!
After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly to ensure it
is securely latched. Damage to the vehicle or cargo
could occur.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your
hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the
device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button
to.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
Programming garage door openers that were
manufactured after 1995 can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has
received the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. On some garage door openers/devices there
may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step
after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push
the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the
training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps."
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash
slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has
received the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow
all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
USING HOMELINK®
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates when the
engine is running for security reasons associated with
removable tops and doors.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower storage
compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch.
To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom
latch.
Console Storage Latches
Under Seat Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two options for under
seat storage:
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Non-Locking Storage Wall
The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for storage by
folding the bottom of the rear seat up and placing items
behind the wall.
There is also an option to remove the wall by removing the
four bolts that connect the storage wall to the floor.
Locking Storage Bin
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin Location
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove
compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Upper Console Storage Latch
2 — Lower Console Storage Latch
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located below the
rear seats. It can be accessed by folding the rear seat
bottom upward into the Stadium Position.
The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on the front
of the bin and uses the same key as the glove
compartment and the center console for your vehicle.
Inside the bin are three removable dividers to set up
storage that works best for you.
The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by unfastening
the four bolts that attach the bin to the vehicle floor using
the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet. The
bottom of the storage bin has rubber mats that need to be
removed to access the four bolts. These bolts can then be
stored in the fastener bin below the rear seat.
Under Seat Storage (Open View)
Your Locking Storage bin also has a front handle that
makes it easier to carry and pull out from the floor of the
vehicle when the four bolts that attach the bin to the floor
are removed.
Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)
Rear Behind Seat Storage — If Equipped
The rear wall storage bin is located behind the right rear
seat.
Rear Wall Storage Bin
Rear Wall Storage Bin
To access the storage bin, pull upward on the pull strap
located on the upper outboard side of the right rear seat,
and fold the seatback forward.
NOTE:
The rear seatback can be locked using the vehicle key to
secure items in the rear wall storage bin. The seat lock is
located on the upper outboard side of each seatback.
Both seatbacks should be locked to limit access to items
behind seat.
1 — Key Locks
2 — Removable Bolts
3 — Handle
1 — Rear Wall Storage Bin
2 — Pull Strap
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Rear Wall Netting
The rear wall netting can be accessed the same way as the
rear wall storage bin.
Rear Wall Netting
Fastener Bin
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin used to store
the fasteners for the doors, windshield, and hard top (if
equipped) while not in use. The Fastener Bin is located
behind the rear seat storage bin. The Fastener Bin
contains foam inserts for each of the fasteners; they are
removable.
To remove the Fastener Bin:
1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the Fastener
Bin.
2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the
Fastener Bin.
NOTE:
The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener Bin.
Fastener Bin
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a 12 V (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that can
provide power for accessories designed for use with the
standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
1 — Door Removal
2 — Under Seat Storage Bin Removal
3 — Folding Windshield
4 — Hard Top Removal
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 A) at
12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A) power rating is exceeded
the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTERS — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter outlet located
on the back of the center console to convert Direct Current
(DC) current to Alternating Current (AC).
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
There may also be a second 115 V (400 W) maximum
exterior power inverter located on the rear right side of the
truck bed near the tailgate. This inverter can be turned on
by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to
the left of the steering wheel. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 W. Certain high-end video game
consoles exceed this limit, as will most power tools. The
indicator light on the power inverter switch will be
illuminated when the inverter is turned on.
Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)
Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. If
two outlets are in use, 400 W is shared amongst the
devices plugged in.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset.
NOTE:
The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will turn off if the power rating is exceeded.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch
bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power
various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be changed
via the Uconnect settings. All switches can be configured
for setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and
ability to hold last state across key cycles.
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is
set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For more information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four
blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections — Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, on the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation
of your electrical devices.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange
Interior (passenger side under instrument
panel)
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Bed Rail Tie Down System allows you to properly
secure cargo in the truck bed.
Bed Rail Tie Down Locations
There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in one of the
detents along either utility rail in order to keep cargo
properly secured.
To move the utility rail cleat to any position on the utility
rail, turn the cleat retainer nut counterclockwise several
times. Then, pull out on the utility rail cleat and slide it to
the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and tighten the nut.
To remove the utility rail cleats from the side utility rails,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located at the end
of the rail toward the front of the vehicle.
To remove the utility rail cleat from the front utility rail,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located on the left
side of the rail.
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck bed to
keep cargo out of view, and protect from inclement
weather.
The Tonneau Cover consists of the following features:
Easy roll up cover
Tonneau fore/aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Rear latches
Stowage straps
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and secured at the
front of the truck bed without removing it completely.
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TONNEAU COVER INSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on the truck
bed and align it to the two fastener locations at the
front of the bed.
Fastener Locations
2. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, secure the fasteners
to the bed.
3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position before
unrolling the Tonneau Cover.
4. Release the stowage straps used to secure the
Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.
Release Stowage Strap
5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the back of
the truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward
6. Position both Tonneau Cover latches over the locking
mechanisms (one on each side of the truck bed),
making sure the plastic retainer is correctly seated in
the forward part of the latch.
Correctly Seated Retainer
Incorrectly Seated Retainer
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is positioned over
the locking mechanism, grasp the back of the
Tonneau Cover and push downward on the center to
engage the locking mechanisms. Make sure an
audible “click” from both sides of the Tonneau Cover
are heard to confirm that the latch is completely
engaged.
Push Downward To Lock
NOTE:
If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this position
(rear panel folded forward) while the tailgate is closed, or
the tailgate can be raised to the mid-position. Refer to
“Tailgate” in this chapter for further information.
Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position
8. Fold the rear panel down; the tailgate can now be
raised and secured in place.
NOTE:
If not leaving the tailgate in the mid-position, the Tonneau
Cover must be closed completely prior to fully closing the
tailgate.
TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Fold the rear panel of the Tonneau Cover forward to
reveal the red release straps.
Release Strap Location
3. Pull one of the red release straps to release the
Tonneau Cover latch.
NOTE:
Pulling either strap will release the latches to roll the
Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to pull both at the
same time.
CAUTION!
Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to the cover
and/or cargo will occur.
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting with the rear
bar and continue to roll toward the front of the truck
bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Forward
5. Using the stowage straps, secure the Tonneau Cover
in the rolled up position.
Secured Tonneau Cover
6. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, remove the two
fasteners securing the Tonneau Cover to the front of
the truck bed.
Fastener Locations
7. Utilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover up and
away from the truck bed.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been completely rolled up,
and straps are secure, before removing.
8. Store in a safe location.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to carry an additional
cargo load on a Hard Top Vehicle. The load carried on the
roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed
100 lbs (45 kg), this includes the weight of the crossbars,
and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
CAUTION!
2
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Premium Instrument Cluster
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
3.
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in this chapter for further information.
4.
Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
5.
Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles
(kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. The Driver Interactive
Display, located in the instrument panel, indicates how
systems are operating and gives you warnings when a
system, or systems, needs your attention. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want to make selections and
adjustments.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales, Compass
Direction, Outside Temperature, Time, Range, Audio
Info, MPG or Trip are displayed. This also displays the
Speedometer which is an option for the upper center
reconfigurable, but is not the default. Default setting is
Menu Title.
The main display area where the menus and pop-up
messages are displayed.
The lower line where telltales, menu name and menu
page are displayed.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button:
Push and release the
up arrow button to
scroll upward through the Main Menu
items.
Down Arrow Button:
Push and release the
down arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items.
Right Arrow Button:
Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the information screens or
submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Left Arrow Button:
Push and release the
left arrow button to
access the information screens or
submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
OK Button:
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Ok Button
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
OFF ROAD + DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the switch bank,
the Instrument Cluster Display will begin to show
messages related to the feature. Depending on the Four
Wheel Drive mode in use, the messages will differ, and
after five seconds, all messages will clear from the display.
The messages are as follows:
2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD
4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active
4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Speed Control are not
available when using Off Road+. If either option is
selected, a dedicated message will display indicating that
the features are not usable concurrently. Messages are as
follows:
4H: Speed Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in Off
Road+
4H: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Unavailable in Off Road+
4L: Speed Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in 4WD
Low
4L: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low
NOTE:
The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while in Off
Road+ varies depending on the 4WD status. If the vehicle
is in 4H, Traction Control is automatically turned off. Also,
holding the ESC Off button for five seconds will turn off
ESC. In 4L, Electronic Stability Control automatically shuts
off regardless of the Off Road Status.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
• Speedometer • Stop/Start
• Vehicle Info • Audio
• Off-Road — If Equipped
• Driver Assist —
If Equipped
• Messages • Fuel Economy
• Screen Setup • Trip Info
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this section for
further information.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle
between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the
OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Off Road — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the Off
Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numer-
ical value of calculated average front wheel angle from
the steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock” graphic only
during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low
status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped): displays
front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway
bar connection graphic with text message (connected
or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic with
the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch
and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the
graphic will be greyed out. A message indicating the
necessary speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
system.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering
wheel), and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display.
Tire Pressure Coolant Temperature
Transmission
Temperature — Auto-
matic Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure Oil Life
Battery Voltage
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel
economy feature.
Toggle
left or right to select a display with or without
Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles
(16 km), the Range display will change to a “LOW”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the
vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a new
Range value will display. Range cannot be reset
through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the last reset.
Current – The display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while driving.
Trip
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display, then push and release the
left or right arrow
button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start
status.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start
status.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous media
source information displayed on the screen. When the
pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the
last used screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows
the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
right
arrow button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
NOTE:
The Screen Setup feature can only be used while the
vehicle is not in motion.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on
the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location in which that
information is displayed.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Menu Title (default setting)
Speedometer
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default Setting)
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped (show/hide)
Driver Assist — If Equipped (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings
Gear Display — Premium Cluster Only
Full (default)
Single
Current Gear
Off (default)
On
Odometer
Show (default)
Hide
Defaults
Cancel
Restore
BATTERY SAVER ON, BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE, AND ELECTRICAL
L
OAD REDUCTION ACTIONS
(I
F EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and ignition off draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stay on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
system. Refer to “Electro - Hydraulic Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition is
first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will turn
on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display,
momentarily replacing the configurable corner information. If
a second row seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip
is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt Reminder Light will change
from green to red and a single chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security alarm is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition
is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will
turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at
the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the
Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and
service is required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on until
fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. It is recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation” in “Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Speed Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in
the sway bar disconnect system.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire life and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive part time mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when front and/or rear axle
locker fault has been detected.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off.
Refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both
axles have been locked. The telltale will display
the lock icon on the front and rear axles to
indicate the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the neutral mode.
Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Off Road+ Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Off
Road+ has been activated.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the Bed
Lamp has been activated.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will
provide power to all four wheels and shift the
power between the front and rear axles as
needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and
slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer
to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Refer to “Stop/Start System — Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the
turn signal indicator will flash independently and
the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will
flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale will
display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to
the specific seating position once the seat belt has
been buckled.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped With a Base Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light —
If Equipped With a Base Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light —
If Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the two wheel drive high mode.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale will
display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to the
specific seating position once the seat belt has been
buckled.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition
is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will
turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at
the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in the
upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the
configurable corner information.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Selec - Speed Control (SSC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec - Speed
Control is activated. Selec - Speed Control is
available in 4WD Low ONLY.
Refer to “Selec - Speed Control (SSC) - If Equipped” in
“Safety” for further information.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states and/or provinces that require an
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
107
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound, as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS
activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
NOTE:
ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in
degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed
Control (SSC), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the
vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by
applying the brakes very quickly, creating the most
efficient braking assistance possible. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function
manages the distribution of the braking torque between
the front and rear axles, by limiting braking pressure to the
rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system anticipates
the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When
ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering
wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the
chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in this section for a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under
various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple
momentary button pushes may be required to return to
“ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
OFF Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active when
"Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will not switch
to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will remain in "Full
Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by
the driver.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate
roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA
will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period.
If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a
small amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is
active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Control system will prepare
the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) is intended for
off-road driving in 4L Range only. SSC
maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4L Range.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The park brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and
the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling
SSC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode if
active. The differences may be notable to the driver as
a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4L Range.
The park brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SSC will exist immediately.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a lamp which offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to
recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will
become active automatically once an excessively swaying
trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced, and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin for each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across
a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to
be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The area on the taillights, where the radar sensors are
located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the taillights where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (brush guards,
bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” in this chapter for further
information.
Warning Light Location
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. The RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display),
and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
system, to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision
button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible more distant collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is
inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance. Customers are encouraged to
use OEM wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING LOW PRESSURE
WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing
the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With a Full-Size Matching Spare
1. Your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor, and can be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next
ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning
Light to be on, a chime to sound, an “Inflate to XX”
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire
Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS system fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in
PARK for vehicles equipped with an Automatic
Transmission. For vehicles equipped with a Manual
Transmission, the park brake must be applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come on
while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative position,
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) —
IF EQUIPPED
STFA is an optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to
allow you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the
vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide
feedback while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you will be able
to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from
XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle
in the Uconnect system application as preset pressure
values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be
stored in the Uconnect system for the front and rear axle.
Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles with
a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating
the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) sensor may
be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/
deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA
states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
over-inflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
level.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no system
fault exists.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position. (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further information).
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
(Continued)
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “Customer Assistance” section for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
(Continued)
(Continued)
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
WARNING!
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim
next to each of the rear seats. This clip is used to hold the
seat belt out of the path of the seatback when it is being
folded and opened. Only place the seat belt webbing in
this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave
the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
Rear Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the rear seat
stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly
on the occupant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a
properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the
driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air
Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel because any
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat
and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in
a category other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of The
Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the
Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether it
should activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright.
Facing forward.
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor.
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position.
Seated Properly
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, including a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child or small adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD
Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may
deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This
can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.
NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indi-
cator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an
adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger
seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front
passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the
OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not
come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify
the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illu-
minate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac-
tivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used.
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) / ISOFIX Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating
Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors
in the center position. The inner anchorages are
19.2 inches (488 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
with the installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind each of the rear seats.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions.
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
ALR – Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
with the installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
The Top Tether anchorages are located behind each rear
seating position. To attach the tether strap of the child
restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
2. Release the seat back by pulling the release strap
located on the top of the seat back to provide room to
reach the tether anchor.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to
adjust the head restraint (if adjustable) to the upward
position to pass the tether strap underneath the head
restraint and between its posts.
4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on the cab
back wall (inside the opening labeled with the tether
anchorage symbol.)
5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch engages
and no red indicator is showing on the strap
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
(Continued)
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat
belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM
THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor
mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
153
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start
regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The “4WD Low Indicator Light” will
illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into
this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
(NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the
ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode
and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To
change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and
use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is
removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is
off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the engine will
turn off and the ignition will change to ACC mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is
removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is
off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver door is removed
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less
Driver seat belt is unbuckled
Driver door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
(Continued)
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(2.0 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h).
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
"Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, it will decrease
as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console
behind the gear selector. To apply the parking brake, pull
the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center button,
then lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is
normal.
Transmission Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear selector into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on
the handle of the selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the
gear selector all the way left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE
or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could
lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox
internal components.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal.
This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is
idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal
released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift
speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and
4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
Above certain speeds downshifts may be blocked and not
available.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip,
and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
CAUTION!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
(Continued)
(Continued)
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and
4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
system which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal
must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
EIGHT–SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.
Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information.
Gear Selector
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it
is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK position
(when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control (refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also
known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the
gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift
the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-)
while in the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector
rearward (+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear
(or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND
or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such as
hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H
and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section
for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery
surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the
vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pres-
sures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle
is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE
or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to
the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to
both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential
automatically proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
R
EAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illuminate),
push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle is
locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or
unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked
or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY —
I
F EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Both right and left wheels on the axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the rear system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or
unlocked.
To unlock the axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows
greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located
on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to disconnect or connect the
sway bar. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash
during activation transition, or when activation conditions
are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or
4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this
section for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left
and right suspension height differences. This condition is
due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In
order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This
alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
Off Road+ Switch
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the Off Road+ switch
in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve
depending of which Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is
activated.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances
vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once
again attempt to return to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in Two Wheel Drive High (2H)
mode. If the button is pushed while in 2H mode, the
cluster display will show the message “Off Road+
Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features will
activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the Instrument
Cluster Display
A mode specific message will display the Instrument
Cluster Display
Off Road pages will launch on the radio head-unit
(if equipped)
The Off Road Camera will launch (if equipped)
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave in
different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The
following enhancements will occur when using Off Road+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule when
rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-gain and
low range, operates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand
performance/ wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited
speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition cycles
Speed Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will not
function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster
message will display indicating this if either feature is
activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the
following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC Button: Traction Control will turn off,
but Stability Control will remain active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Control will turn off.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and a good feel while driving. If the
electro-hydraulic power steering system experiences a
fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist,
then the system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically
driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
HVAC set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Engine temperature too high
The transmission is not in a forward gear
Hood is open
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
Accelerator pedal input
Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from previous
auto-stop
Steering angle beyond threshold
ACC is on and speed is set
Vehicle is at high altitude
System fault present
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds
5 minutes
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/
Start system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is cycled off and
back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal will
automatically restart the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. It will remain in
STOP/START NOT READY until you drive
forward with a vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and
the clutch pedal must be fully released.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will fall to the
Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
message will appear, and the heater/air conditioning
(HVAC) air flow will be reduced.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In
following situations the engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C)
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Battery discharged
When driving in REVERSE
Hood is open
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is open
Vehicle is at high altitude
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Forward Gear is engaged
Steering angle beyond threshold
System fault is present
HVAC set to MAX A/C
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start
when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require
complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/
START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
mode, the engine will start automatically when:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE time exceeds
5 minutes
Battery voltage drops too low
Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/
Start system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually switched off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the
ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is cycled off and
back on.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed
Control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the speed
control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
O
PERATION
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the
vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
When you apply the brakes
When the parking brake is applied
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, will
bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in first gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
ESC Full Off mode is active
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
TO SET A DESIRED ACC SPEED
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle. On vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission, the system cannot be set
when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) or
when the vehicle is in first gear.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the acceler-
ator pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO CANCEL
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
The clutch is depressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual transmission only)
TO TURN OFF
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low
TO RESUME
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after
coming to a full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
With Target Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages. Refer to “To Activate/Deacti-
vate” earlier in this section.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
OVERTAKE AID
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC OPERATION AT A STOP
(A
UTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ONLY)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, your vehicle will
resume motion without the need for any driver action if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
If the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened while ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
M
ENU
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
M
AINTENANCE
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
still available. For additional information refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of poor
visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
“Service ACC/FCW” Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH
ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.
In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The
driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
NOTE:
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/
radar field of view.
Cracks in the windshield may affect the performance of
ACC, depending on the size and location of the crack.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC
performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE
C
ONTROL MODE
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was set. This
light will turn on when the system is turned on via the on/
off control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph)
or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependent on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual transmission
only).
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only).
The clutch is depressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only).
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only).
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up (e.g.
during a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system's
operating speed, a warning will appear within the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2- Second
Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
(Continued)
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the climate controls.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD Low).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the
vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors/ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound
and Display” is selected from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display
will show a single solid arc in the center front region and will
produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to
the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from a single
1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is
detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2- Second
Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches / cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
the brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS”, “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap,
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn the ParkSense system off, the instru-
ment cluster display will show a vehicle graphic of the
ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “ParkSense OFF”
message. This message will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to appear in the
instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the
lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE. The image will
be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top
of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the tailgate, above the
vehicle license plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the “Controls”
button located on the bottom of the Uconnect
display, and then press “Backup Camera”.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch
Display, there is only one option for manual activation of
the Rear View Camera. Press the “More” button on the
Uconnect system, and then press “Backup Camera”.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen button “X” to disable display of the Rear View
Camera image is pressed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls"
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to
8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated.
The image will continue to be displayed until the display
timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X",
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Trailer Hitch Zoom
If equipped, the Trailer Hitch Zoom feature aids the driver
in lining up a trailer to the vehicle’s trailer hitch by allowing
the driver to toggle back and forth between the normal
view and a 4X zoom mode by pressing the “magnifying
glass” icon on the touchscreen. The image is displayed on
the radio screen when the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, as well as manually in certain situations
through the Controls screen.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows
you to you see an on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
The TrailCam System has programmable settings that may
be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below methods:
Press the “FWD Camera” button on the Controls
screen.
Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button on the apps
menu.
Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off Road Pages.
If equipped, “Auto Launch Off Road+” is selected under
camera settings, and the “Off Road+” button is
pressed.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the Backup Camera view. The Backup
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off) and TrailCam view is active, the TrailCam
mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned on) and the TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the touchscreen button “X” to disable
display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer
for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in 2WD or 4H, the TrailCam image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen button “X”, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the “Clean Camera” soft button located on
the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will
stop when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a time
while holding the button.
The “Clean Camera” system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are projected on
the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
steering wheel position.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. To access the fuel filler cap, push on the fuel filler
door to unlatch it. To close the fuel filler door, push on it a
second time. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be
sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this
vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is prop-
erly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illu-
minate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR on front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue.
It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain in this section.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
Sport - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Sport - Automatic Transmission 9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Sport - Automatic Transmission
(Tow Package)
11,100 lb (5,035 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Sport - Automatic Transmission
(Max Tow Package)
12,800 lb (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lb (3,470 kg) 765 lb (347 kg)
Sport S - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Sport S - Automatic Transmission 9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When using a bumper mounted ball on any model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg), 30 ft
2
(2.79 m
2
) frontal area, and 350 lbs (159 kg) tongue weight.
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
Sport S - Automatic Transmission
(Tow Package)
11,100 lb (5,035 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Sport S - Automatic Transmission
(Max Tow Package)
12,800 lb (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lb (3,470 kg) 765 lb (347 kg)
Overland - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Overland - Automatic
Transmission
9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Overland - Automatic
Transmission (Tow Package)
11,100 lb (5,035 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Mojave - Manual Transmission 9,900 lb (4,491 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Mojave - Automatic Transmission 11,450 lb (5,194 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Rubicon - Manual Transmission 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Rubicon - Automatic Transmission 12,450 lb (5,647 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,000 lb (3,175 kg) 700 lb (317 kg)
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper
inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
NOTE:
This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller
connector under the dash to the left of the brake pedal.
This will be a four pin connector and will be gray in color.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral, auto-
matic transmission must be in PARK, and manual trans-
mission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there
is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in
Neutral) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case
in (N) Neutral and the engine running. With the transfer
case in (N) Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral, the
engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They
are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed
to prevent damage.
1. There are two nuts connecting to the body side and
one bolt connecting to the underbody on each
attachment bracket. There are four attachment
brackets on each side step.
Fastener Locations (One Side)
2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the underside of
the vehicle for each of the four brackets. Repeat for
other side of vehicle.
Underside Nuts
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed, pull the
side step assembly off of the vehicle.
4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to the body
side holes and fasten all nuts on all four brackets.
Then secure all four bolts to the underbody. Repeat
the reassembly procedure for the other side.
Bumper End Cap Removal — If Equipped
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be
removed by following the steps below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumper only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit
screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store
it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You
should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and
ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one
of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving
posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In
most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good
judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a trail, you
should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route
while remembering what you are currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start System be disabled
during off-road use.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional traction
and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or
descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling
power. This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4L range.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle
on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can
result.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly back
and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your
momentum.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE,
with the transfer case in the 4L position to maintain your
momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly back
and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck.
They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles
getting stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers
and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going
to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce
your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure
will drastically improve your traction and handling while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires
prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine
RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may
cause skidding and loss of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires.
This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The
tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and
make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You
should now be able to drive out following the trench you
just created at a 45-degree angle.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease
the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is
the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on
what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place
a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try
rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are
just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You
should always feel confident with the vehicle and your
abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission
into a lower gear with 4L engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the
front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to
bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you
approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more
than a quarter turn quickly back and forth. This will provide
a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back
straight down the grade using engine resistance along
with the vehicle brakes.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking
to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
(Continued)
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know your
vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something
goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into
the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt
to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The
key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into FIRST gear
(manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3 to 5 mph{5 to 8 km/h} maximum) and light
throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate
through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than
the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all
of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters;
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth,
current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering.
This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
then proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can
cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or
other vehicle components, and your brakes will be
less effective once wet and/or muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
5
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle
downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very
shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in
jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and
vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
driveline, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission
bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
or drowning.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
215
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be
connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its loca-
tion. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
a connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with the vehicle
occupants, and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator until
the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-
tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions
occur to allow the condensation to change back into a
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away, starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to
the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn a quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter turn
clockwise.
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service
Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
Front Park/Turn Signal
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for service.
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb
straight from the socket to replace.
LED Front Side Marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electrical connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for service.
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screws
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward, far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing, from the two
plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side
panel.
3. Remove the screws from assembly bracket to access
the three bulb sockets.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assembly Bracket
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise, then remove it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on the tailgate. If service is
needed, obtain the LED assembly from an authorized
dealer.
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace these LED
assemblies.
FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
electrical current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
an extended periods of time with the engine off it may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is labeled with
each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems (marked with *) must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency
Hub (RF HUB)/Electric Steering Column
Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch
Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical Pkg (SWITCH
BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink –
Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR
LIGHTS
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
F23 – 10 Amp Red
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine
Control Module (ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green –
Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR
LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
F28 40 Amp Green –
Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER
LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green –
Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR
LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod
(HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering Column Lock
(SCL)/Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module
(DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera
Module (IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps
(AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric
Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)/Smart
Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD - If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W - If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module ECM
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle
Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay
(SGW) WAKE UP
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F42 – 10 Amp Red
Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric
Stop/Start)
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC - If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter
400W Wake Up/USB/InSide RearView
Mirror (ISRVM)/Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker - If Equipped
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red
Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
or Parktronics Module
F56 – 10 Amp Red In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue
Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM)
(HTD STR WHEEL)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
F61 – 10 Amp Red
Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind
Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG - If Equipped
F73 – – Spare
F74 – – Spare
F75 – – Spare
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – – Spare
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid
1 2 Block Shift
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG - If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT - If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR - If Equipped
F86 – – Spare
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP - If Equipped
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/#2 - If Equipped
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/
Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV
(DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP - If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 - If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 - If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red TPM/CORAX
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 - If Equipped
F104 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat
Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT - If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 - If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT - If Equipped
F110 – – Spare
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK LOCATION
The jack and jack tools are stored under the right rear
seat. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
1. Fold up the right rear seat.
2. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift
the assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tools
3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove
tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Jack And Tool Bag
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with hook can
be added to this assembly to enable lowering of the spare
tire without having to raise the tailgate.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
Assembled For Jack Operation
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle.
Access Hole Location
2. Insert the extension tube through the access hole
between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism
adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension With Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the
vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a
manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked in position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do
not remove) by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Front Jack Lifting Point
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission to
REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jack Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
ground surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage.
Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened
twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for correct lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle for
convenience in checking the spare tire inflation.
Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the
wheel.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
Reinstalling The Retainer
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tubes through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
be overtightened. Push against the tire several times
to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug
wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position
holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, place the jack
and tools under the rear seat.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor
pan.
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools or bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the
engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive
(+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
Positive (+) Battery Post Cover
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will
be equipped with two batteries. Refer to “Stop/Start
System — If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in
NEUTRAL) and place the ignition in OFF mode.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the main battery
to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or death
could result if you attempt to jump start using the
supplemental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the igni-
tion switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables
are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end
(-) of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) , but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
manual park release cover located in front of the gear
selector, to access the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until the
release lever locks into place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK (P) and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and
to the right, into its original position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (with
automatic transmission) or SECOND (2) gear and
REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial OFF mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
switch again to restore "ESC ON" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in
PARK (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear (
NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (P)
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear (
NOT in NEUTRAL,
for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved method
of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear bumpers.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap.
Front Tow Hook
Rear Tow Hook
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing the
vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident
Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display,
“Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster
odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in
a dusty and off-road environment, or is operated
predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, rear suspension,
tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km),
whichever comes first.
X X
Change the manual transmission fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi,
police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50%
of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
HEAVY DUTY USE OF THE VEHICLE
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only
very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 10 — Engine Air Cleaner
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at
the top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.
They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further informa-
tion.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Bot the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in
the system, resulting in damage to essential elec-
trical components.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
PRESSURE WASHING
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Change Engine Oil
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum Institute
(API). The manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar® SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine
Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the
recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter
changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended. Precautions have been
taken to safeguard all parts and connections however,
the pressures generated by these machines is such
that complete protection against water ingress cannot
be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine oil filters
are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner cover
using a suitable tool.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner
filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Retainers
2 — Air Filter Cover
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the
housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present
before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection
surface facing downward.
2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a suitable
tool.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks, that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. This is not a reason to replace the belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. In addition, have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by an authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Polyalkylene
Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Filter Replacement
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located online, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may
propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the air
filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.
Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right
for clearance.
Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
7. Close A/C air filter access door and secure retaining
tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
position, ensuring you have properly engaged the
travel dampener.
Travel Dampener
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled
Servicing” in this chapter for the proper maintenance
intervals.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors, and hood hinges should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit. After lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant, directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines, or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
push the release tab on the wiper blade, and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 —Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle,
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device,
may seriously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will need
to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized
dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deion-
ized water, when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or
HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals
or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine in the OFF mode and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the freezing point of the coolant (antifreeze) in
the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If
determined that more engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added to the radiator, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check
the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected, inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below
the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the
axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-
fications” for further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified
on the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a
tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-
edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
WARNING!
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
TRANSFER CASE
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended manual
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water,
it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to
the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled Servicing”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
1 — Fill Hole
2 — Drain Hole
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter “P” is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire, or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire, at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And
Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lb.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lb.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
(Continued)
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lb
(392 kg).
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C), and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading, and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
If equipped with Run Flat tires, and they are damaged, or
experience a loss of pressure, should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h), or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure — Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality, and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your
tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware, these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C), or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires that are
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h),
refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRE MATCHING ORIGINAL
E
QUIPPED TIRE AND WHEEL
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. Refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle,
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent, is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Install on rear tires only.
245/75R17 tire with the use of a traction device that
meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recom-
mended.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system then
disconnect both the main and supplemental negative
battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery connection
point, as well as the main battery terminal from the
post, as shown in the image, to fully de-energize both
batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
nect the battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS),
or your Stop/Start system may not function for up to
24 hours, due to the IBS being set into learn mode.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it
can cause a potential power spike or surge in the
system, resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather, and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool, or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clean
water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax, to remove road film and stains, and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials,
such as steel wool or scouring powder, that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior trim
and top, follow these precautions:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.
Window scratches and wax build up may result.
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on
the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows” in this section.
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles.
If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar® Convertible Cloth
Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on
the entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing
the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow
the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing
stations. Wash the vehicle only by hand using neutral
pH detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather.
Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be
used for cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid
they contain is particularly aggressive.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when
dried, it may only be possible to remove them with
abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly
inadvisable as they could alter the typical opaque-
ness of the paint.
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for cleaning
the front windshield and rear window; dilute it min.
50% with water. Only use pure windshield washer
fluid when strictly necessary due to outside tempera-
ture conditions.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
(Continued)
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows that
can be scratched unless special care is taken by following
these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,
use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all the
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protec-
tion to help prevent yellowing.
When washing,
never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with
a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
When removing frost, snow, or ice,
never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
clean the window quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer opera-
tion. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
will eventually impact window plastic retainer opera-
tion. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer should be
cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a
mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning prod-
ucts are available through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
carpet that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when the
carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to inter-
fere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the carpet and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install carpet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
carpet for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check that the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check
for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING!
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets:
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for
the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split
and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet
to the front (do not remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and
then remove the last two grommets.
6. When reinstalling carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order, making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, and console, and then
refasten the grommets.
Rear Carpet
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
Carpet Split
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seat brackets.
3. Remove the rear Under Seat storage bin (if
equipped), by removing the four bolts that hold it to
the floor.
4. Remove the fastener bin from the rear floor, it is held
in by clips.
1 — Grommets
1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommet
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
5. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift
the assembly out from under the seat.
6. Lift carpet off of the rear retainers (one left and one
right).
Rear Retainers
7. Remove carpet from the vehicle.
8. When reinstalling the carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and then refasten
the grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
7
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER PARTS
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® Total Clean
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
283
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left
front corner of the A pillar, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 mm 22 mm
8
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy
and performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 285
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT.
Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline
may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you
should ask a gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal law and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine, certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
8
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
*Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 287
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
8
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure
to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front Axles) We recommend you use Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear M200 Sales Code DRZ) We recommend you use Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140) (API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend you use Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
289
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer
or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available Uconnect soft-
ware updates.
Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to the nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen
to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
U
CONNECT 3 SETTINGS
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The
Faceplate
Push the Settings button to display the settings menu
screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to
access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting and
make your selection. Once the setting is selected, press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/
RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable
options pertaining to each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the Instrument Cluster Display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measurement independently.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format
12 hr 24 hr
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
By selecting On/Off, this setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS.
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines On Off
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning —
If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume —
If Equipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume —
If Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist On Off
Tire Fill Assist On Off
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach + -
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the driver's door is opened when the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’
doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result
in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the
outside door handle is grabbed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Settings — If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Doors On Key Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay + -
Setting Name Selectable Options
When the Compass Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to compass variance and calibration. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To
compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
vehicle is driven, per the zone map. The zone options are 1-15. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most
accurate compass heading.
Compass Calibration
Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is
self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON button on the touchscreen and completing one
or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The
compass will now function normally.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
AUX Switches
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State On Off
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the
scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the
desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button Left Arrow Button Right Arrow Button Center C Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front/rear or right/left side
speakers. Press the C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in “Uconnect 3 with 5-inch display” section.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you
to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access
the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings To Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
U
CONNECT 4 SETTINGS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen And Faceplate
Buttons
Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or press the
Apps button, then press the Settings button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
“option” until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is selected, either press the Back Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press
the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights On + -
Display Brightness Headlights Off + -
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Auto-Show Smartphone Display Upon Connection On Off
Control Screen Timeout - If Equipped On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the Instrument Cluster Display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measurement independently.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
Camera — If Equipped
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Front Camera Gridlines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ Off Forward Facing Camera
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitoring not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Front Camera Gridlines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ Off Forward Facing Camera
Hill Start Assist On Off
Tire Fill Assist On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach + -
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’
doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result
in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry - If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the
outside door handle is grabbed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State On Off
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance & Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance & Fade of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness Yes No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped On Off
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in the “Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access
the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings To Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
U
CONNECT 4/4C/4C NAV SETTINGS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to
access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
“option” until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is selected, either press the Back Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the
X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV radio, along with the
selectable options pertaining to each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the
navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to
the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights On + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights Off On Off
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme Set Theme
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option
button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout On Off
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will
stay open until it is manually closed.
Auto Launch with Off Road+ Off Forward Camera Off Road
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches
a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km) “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always w/Help Never
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected back up path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ — If Equipped Off Forward Facing Camera Off Road Pages
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Automatic Emergency Braking — If Equipped Selectable Options
NOTE:
Forward Collision Warning (if equipped) and Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity (if equipped) are selectable options once this setting is selected.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only
Warning + Active
Braking
Forward Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitoring not operating to specification.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Hill Start Assist On Off
Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlights with Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, and the driver's door is opened when the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob
unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock
button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door”
is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the Passive
Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
AUX Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State On Off
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Key Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons or by selecting any point on the scale between the
+ and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
MULTIMEDIA 319
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access
the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Apps — If Equipped Back Next
NOTE:
Restoring Apps will delete all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or installing apps. To restore apps, press the Next button in the pop-up screen, and then
press “Yes” on the confirmation screen. To keep installed apps, press “Cancel.”
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 MULTIMEDIA
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software Licenses Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio.
Map Update — If Equipped Download System Information To USB Generate Request Code
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. “Generate Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online
when downloading the maps.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
MULTIMEDIA 321
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
SAFETY GUIDELINES
Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before
using the system. It contains instructions on how to use
the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a
safe location and set the parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return
it to an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully before
using your system to ensure proper usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or the system at loud volumes. Exercise caution
when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system, mois-
ture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic
device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touch-
screen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the
internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic
energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile
phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be
restricted in some situations or environments, such as
aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter Radio
Mode. The different tuner modes; FM/AM/SXM (if
equipped), can be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2 — COMPASS
Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to display the
current direction of the vehicle.
3 — SETTINGS
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to display the
customer programmable features.
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access
additional options.
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary
knob to scroll through a list or tune to a radio station.
6 — SCREEN OFF
Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the touchscreen off.
To turn the touchscreen back on, press the screen.
7 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of the radio
system. Press it again to turn the audio back on.
8 — VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume. Push the
VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system ON or OFF.
9 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to access the
Uconnect Phone feature.
10 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will allow you
to switch to Media mode: CD (if equipped), USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth®.
RADIO MODE
Operating Radio Mode
Radio Mode
1 — Station Presets
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio
5 — Info
6 — Tune
7 — AM/FM/SXM
8 — Seek Down
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
MULTIMEDIA 323
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes – FM/AM/SXM (if
equipped) – can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the Radio
mode.
VOLUME/POWER Knob
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to adjust the
Volume. When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last played.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system on or
off.
MUTE Button
Push the MUTE button to mute the system. Push the MUTE
button again to unmute the system.
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen
to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to
advance the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station
or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the
starting station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to advance the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune Functions
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to directly tune
to a specific radio station. A keypad will appear. On the
keypad, enter in your desired radio station, and the system
will automatically tune to it.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio, and enjoy
all you want, all in one place. Hear commercial-free music,
sports, news, talk, and entertainment. Get all the premium
programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL® game,
every MLB®, every NHL® game, every NASCAR® race,
Martha Stewart, Oprah Radio, and more. Get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20
channels of commercial-free music, news, talk, comedy,
sports, and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew
and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer
Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US
Residents) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All
fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite
service is available only to those at least 18 and older in
the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service
is also available in Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations).
Our Internet radio service is available throughout our
satellite service area and in Alaska and Hawaii. © 2022
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. To receive satellite radio, the vehicle
needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may need to
change the vehicle’s position to receive a signal. In most
cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in
underground parking garages or tunnels.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes and are
activated by pressing any of the four Preset buttons on the
touchscreen, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you
hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
modes. Four presets are visible at the top of the radio
screen.
Audio Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side of the
radio faceplate. If the settings button is not present,
push the MORE button on the faceplate, then the
Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the
touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you
to customize your audio settings:
Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on the
touchscreen to select between ON or OFF. This
feature determines if music automatically starts
playing from a device when it is first connected to
the Media hub’s USB port.
Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on the
touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the + or – buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. Press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when
done.
Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade button
on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and
rear or right and left side speakers. Press the
Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the
balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the
Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed Adjusted
Volume button on the touchscreen to select
between OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the
radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle
speed. Press the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen when done.
Loudness — Press the Loudness button on the
touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated, it improves sound quality
at lower volumes.
Clock Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, or push
the MORE button on the faceplate, and then the
SETTINGS button on the touchscreen.
2. Select the Clock and Date button on the touchscreen.
3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.
4. Select Set Date to change the date.
5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek Down
arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs vs 24 hrs”,
“AM” or “PM” or select the “Time Zones” (if
equipped).
6. Select the Done button when complete.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
MULTIMEDIA 325
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode button on the
touchscreen. Disc (if equipped), USB, SD Card (if
equipped), AUX and Bluetooth® (if equipped), are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
song playing.
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen
for the next selection. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the track is within the first few
seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen
and the desired mode will begin to fast forward through
the current track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
and the desired mode will begin to rewind through the
current track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the iPod®, MP3
player, phone, or USB. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to repeat the
song selection. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button
on the touchscreen a second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the
selections on the USB/iPod® or Bluetooth® device in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second
time to turn this feature off.
Track Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the X button on the
touchscreen to cancel this feature.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable audio settings.
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port, or by pushing
the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen, and
select the USB/iPod® button.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the USB Port. If
you insert a USB/iPod® device with the ignition ON, the
unit will switch to USB/iPod® mode and begin to play
when you insert the device. The display will show the track
number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to select
Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or Folders from the
USB/iPod® device. Once the desired selection is made
you can chose from the available media by pressing the
button on the touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device containing
music to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
with the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the
Uconnect system.
Refer to Phone Mode section for pairing procedure.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the Uconnect
system, push the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions,
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device using a
stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or
by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen, and select the AUX button.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If
you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition on, the unit
will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists,
play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio;
use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with
the VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the
attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be
insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music
on the device.
PHONE MODE
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Phone Signal Strength
3 — Paired Phone
4 — Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
MULTIMEDIA 327
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system with voice command
capability. Refer to Voice Recognition (VR) within this
publication for further information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number
with your mobile phone using simple voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped
with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile. To check mobile
phone compatibility, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to activate the
Phone mode.
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers using the graphic keypad on
the display.
Display and call the contacts in the mobile phone
phonebook.
Display and call contacts from the Recent Calls menu.
Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make access
and connection easier and quicker.
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone and
vice versa.
Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the
vehicle’s audio system. The system automatically mutes
the radio when the Phone function is used.
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile
Phone Or Bluetooth® Device
PAIRING A PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to reference
your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up appears asking if you would
like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
Pairing A Phone
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 MULTIMEDIA
If “No” is selected and you still would like to pair a mo-
bile phone, press the Settings button from the
Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select the Paired Phones button, and then press
the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect Phone.
Some mobile phones will require you to enter the
PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
the Yes button will make this phone the highest
priority. This phone will take precedence over other
paired phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If the No button is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth®
device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However,
first, make sure to delete the device from the list of
phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
STORING NAMES/NUMBERS IN THE MOBILE
PHONE
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make sure
you have stored the names you want to contact in the
phonebook on your mobile phone, so you can call them
using the vehicle's hands-free system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names, enter new
names for the most frequently used numbers.
For further details, consult your mobile phone owner's
handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not contain phone
numbers or where both fields (name and surname) are
empty will not be displayed.
CONNECTION
The system connects automatically to the paired mobile
phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using
the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Connect button.
6. During the connection stage, a screen is displayed
showing the progress of the operation.
7. The device connected is highlighted in the list.
DISCONNECTION
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth®
audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using
the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Disconnect button.
Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A
Bluetooth® Audio Device
To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device from
a list, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using
the corresponding button on the display.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
MULTIMEDIA 329
4. Select the device (mobile phone or Bluetooth®
device).
5. Press the Delete Device button.
6. A confirmation screen will appear on the display:
Press the Yes button to delete the device.
Press the No button to cancel the operation.
Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device As A Favorite
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device as a
favorite, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using
the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Make Favorite button.
6. The device selected is moved to the top of the list.
Downloading A Phonebook From Your
Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names
(text names) and number entries from your mobile
phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® enabled phones
with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature.
See UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names
(text names) and number entries from your mobile
phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones
with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature.
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update begins as soon
as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone. For example, after you start the
vehicle. You may be asked for permission to initiate the
phonebook download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the mobile phone-
book.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And
Recent Calls)
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to delete the list
of recent calls and the phonebook copy.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The "Keyboard" Icon On
The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad
displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and use the
number buttons to enter the number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone Number
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full name or
phone number).
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the following call
types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent Calls
button on the Phone menu main screen.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 MULTIMEDIA
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress
When a phone conversation is active, a second phone call
can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number using the
graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made, press the
Redial button.
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following phone call
functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call Currently In
Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on the
Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the
touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on the
Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the
touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel to answer the call and put the ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones may support the management of an
incoming call when another phone conversation is active.
Managing Two Phone Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), it
is possible to switch between them pressing the Call On
Hold button or to merge the two calls in a conference
pressing the Merge Calls button.
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use supports the
management of a second call and the "Conference" mode.
Transferring/Call Continuation
Transferring
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the mobile
phone to the system and vice versa without ending the
call.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
Call Continuation
After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to
continue a phone call.
The call continues until it is ended manually or for a
maximum period of about 20 minutes.
When the system is switched off, the call is transferred to
the mobile phone.
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the PHONE
button on the steering wheel controls to end a call in
progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold
becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the ongoing call
is ended by the caller, the call on hold may not be
activated automatically.
Uconnect Phone Features
MUTE/UNMUTE
1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND button on
the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
READING MESSAGES
The system can read the messages received by the mobile
phone.
To use this function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function via Bluetooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone, the
corresponding message button is deactivated (grayed out)
or may only accept incoming messages.
When a text message is received, the display will show a
screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or "Ignore" can be
selected.
Press the Message button to access the list of SMS
messages received by the mobile phone. The list displays
a maximum of 60 messages received.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
MULTIMEDIA 331
BROWSING SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and
manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the
instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone
must support the SMS exchange function through
Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu,
and then select “SMS Reader” using the arrow keys on the
steering wheel controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10 SMS
messages to be displayed.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
1.
Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM, FM, and
SXM can be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2.
Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access
media sources such as USB Device, AUX, and
Bluetooth® as long as the requested media is pres-
ent.
3.
Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further details.
4.
Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen to access
Smartphone and Connected vehicle options.
5.
Controls
Press the Controls button on the touchscreen to ad-
just the heated and vented seats or heated steering
wheel (if equipped).
6.
Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to access
the Uconnect Phone feature.
7.
Settings
Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to ac-
cess the Uconnect Settings menu.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, bottom left
corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off the
screen and mute the radio. Push the Volume/Power
control knob a second time to turn the screen back on and
unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
Volume/Power control knob clockwise increases the
volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a
selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right, provides
a means to close the Direct Tune Screen. The Direct Tune
Screen also auto closes if no activity occurs within a few
seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pressing the left
Steering Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen
to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to
advance the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station
or channel. During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to advance the radio through the available stations or
channel at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen located at the
bottom of the radio screen. The Direct Tune button on the
touchscreen is available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes
and can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the bottom left on
the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press the
OK button, and the Direct Tune screen will close. The
system will automatically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is displayed in
the Direct Tune text box.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the six Preset buttons on the
touchscreen, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you
hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
modes. A set of six presets are visible at the top of the
radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets by pressing
the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio
touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob, or by
pressing the Up and Down arrow keys, located on the right
of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Preset and returns to the main radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by pressing the
X button on the touchscreen when in the Browse Presets
screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a one year
trial to the SiriusXM® All Access package, providing over
160 channels of the best programming for all the places
life takes you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel available on
your radio, including all the premium programming like
Howard Stern, every NFL® game, every MLB® game,
every NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio subscrip-
tion included with the All Access trial, you’ll get Siri-
usXM® on your computer, smartphone, or tablet.
Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM® Latino –
a collection of Spanish-language channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize your favorite
music channels
Go to https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin for more
information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle
purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you
call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. All fees and programming subject to
change. Our satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in PR (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area and in AK.
© 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the Radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is
able to receive the Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-888-539-7474
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see Presets, browse,
Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions common to
all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather Jump, and
fav button functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
REPLAY
The replay function provides a means to store and replay
up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/
pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the
top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen, any time during the Replay mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play button on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the RW button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds
the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen forwards
the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the
content can only be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, can not be done for live content.
A continuous press of the FW button on the touchscreen
also forwards the content. The Radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume
playing of Live content.
FAVORITES
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to activate the
favorites menu, which will time out in five seconds in
absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X in the
top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist, or
song that is currently playing. The Radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite song, or
favorite artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Artist,
press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav.
Artist button on the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Song,
press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav
Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit a sub
menu to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back
Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel
list by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the
right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list
of Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing
the Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with the
content in the selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of the Browse
screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up and down
arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can Icon for the corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a Visual
alert or Audible and Visual alert when one of your favorites
is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Selections or press the Trash Can Icon next to the
Selection to be deleted.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert me to
on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score update” or
both when one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides a list of your
featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio main menu
or within the Settings main menu, to activate the Audio
settings screen for adjusting Balance & Fade, Equalizer,
Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset,
Auto Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X
located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touchscreen to
balance audio between the front speakers or fade the
audio between the rear and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or press
and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/
Fade.
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate
the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and dragging over
the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume
screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from
Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the automatic adjustment of the
audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume
increases automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate
Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear audio coming
from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre
system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate
Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at lower volumes
improves.
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen to
activate the AUX Volume Offset screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing of the +
and – buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The
level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is
displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to activate
the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and Off. With
Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected
device, immediately after it is connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the touchscreen
to activate the Radio Off With Door screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps
the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened,
or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.
MEDIA MODE
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device or iPod® and cable into the USB Port or by pressing
the Select Source button on the left side of the display,
and then selecting USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen
for the next selection on the USB device/iPod®. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
return to the beginning of the current selection or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB
device/iPod® is within the first three seconds of the
current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the
browse window. The left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through the
contents of the USB device/iPod®. If supported by the
device, you can browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists,
Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be scrolled by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/
Scroll knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the
desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the
repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the
touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the
selections on the USB/iPod® device in random order to
provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a
pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song
title. When in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line
above and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If
you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play
when you insert the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists,
play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio;
use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with
the Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of the
attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the
desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing
music, to the Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone section
for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select Source
button on the left side of the display, and then select
Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth®
device. Press and release the Seek Down button on
the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the first
second of the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the
desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, press the
Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with
the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a
red arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® —
If Equipped
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your
carrier and mobile phone manufac-
turer. Some Android Auto™ features
may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect system, and
your Android™ 6.0 or higher powered smartphone with a
data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display.
Android Auto™ automatically brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards that
appear just when they are needed. Android Auto™ can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the
steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen to
control many of your apps. To use Android Auto™, follow
the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
plug your device in, the app will begin to download.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
“Phone” icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes
to the Android Auto™ Icon. Android Auto™ should
launch, but if it does not, refer to “Android Auto™ And
Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for the
procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can
also launch it by touching the Android Auto™ icon on
the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling, and texting for communication
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
corner of the radio screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 6.0 or
higher and download app on Google Play. Android™,
Android Auto™ and Google Play are trademarks of Google
Inc.
ANDROID AUTO™ MAPS
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap
the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation
icon in Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in
Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command
said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides
voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/
(US Residents) https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/
auto (Canadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
ANDROID AUTO™ MUSIC
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream your
favorite music with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data
plan, you can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™, for them to work
with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing through Android
Auto™, select the Uconnect System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
ANDROID AUTO™ COMMUNICATION
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition
specific to the Android Auto™. This will allow you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages
read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
ANDROID AUTO™ APPS
The Android Auto™ App will display all the compatible apps
that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
is launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available
apps for Android Auto™.
APPLE CARPLAY® INTEGRATION
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your
carrier and mobile phone manufac-
turer. Some Apple CarPlay® features
may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the
smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone® in the car,
and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect
Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls,
and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®,
Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
“Phone” icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes
to the Apple CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® should
launch, but if not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple
CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for the
procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can
also touch the Apple CarPlay® icon on the
touchscreen to launch it.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of
Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
APPLE CARPLAY® PHONE
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session.
You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri
on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a Siri session,
and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
APPLE CARPLAY® MUSIC
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s®
data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps
including music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
APPLE CARPLAY® MESSAGES
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri to
send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but driver’s will not be able to read
messages, as everything is done via voice.
APPLE CARPLAY® MAPS
To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your Uconnect
system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired
destination. Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category, by
launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by
typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect
navigation system.
APPLE CARPLAY® APPS
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®, you must
have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US
Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of available
apps for Apple CarPlay®.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE CARPLAY® TIPS
AND TRICKS
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system that
automatically begins playing music off of the connected
device, as soon as it is connected. This feature can be
turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first time and
undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone will
automatically pair to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with Bluetooth®,
a USB connection is required for its use. Android Auto™
uses both Bluetooth® and USB connections to function,
and the connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one that
will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another device can
also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as
an audio source, so the passenger can stream music.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is connected to
a media USB, and there is another device plugged in,
you will need to manually change the configuration of
the USB connection in order for the Samsung device to
send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be unavail-
able when Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® are in use.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone
allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free text message reply. (Forward one of 18
pre-defined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
View call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided throughout
this manual. For quick use, go to the Voice Recognition
Quick Tips section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the main phone screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listening to music on your Bluetooth® device via the
touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system automatically mutes
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on Global Sys-
tem Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile
phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Access Profile
(MAP) profile]
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works no matter
where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone
allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to
the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel is used
to get into the phone mode and make calls, show recent,
incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you are already
in a call and you want to send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the
Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
from the steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as
“I would like to.”
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on your steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button (if active)
on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to reference
your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to
pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled. Once
enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth® connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the “Phone Settings” button
from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press the Add
Device button on the touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However,
first, make sure to delete the device from the list of
phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR ADDITIONAL MOBILE PHONES
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen
from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted
on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The latest phone paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect
screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
“Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
device will take precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The latest device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list
of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device
follow these steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Sources
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device. A pop-up menu will appear, press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.
DELETING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio Devices button
on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the “Uconnect Voice Recogni-
tion Quick Tips” section.
Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES
There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Contacts
from the Phone main screen, and then select the
appropriate number. Press the down arrow symbol
button next to the selected number to display the
options pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favorites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the contact
you want to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
WAYS TO INITIATE A PHONE CALL
Here are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with
Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
DIAL BY SAYING A NUMBER
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
CALL BY SAYING A PHONEBOOK NAME
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
TOUCH-TONE NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press Call.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the steering
wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone End) press the VR
button to send a touch-tone and say “Send 1234#” or you
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password
is stored in your mobile phonebook.
RECENT CALLS
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button
on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and say “Show my incoming calls” from any screen and
the incoming calls will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” “Recent”,
or “Missed.”
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the
call. You can also press the Answer button on the
touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call
waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Press the Uconnect Phone button on the steering
wheel, answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to
place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market
today do not support rejecting an incoming call when
another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do Not
Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold button on the Phone
main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between
Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join
Calls” in this section.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone
End button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button
on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the
new active call.
REDIAL
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the
VR button and after the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
BROWSING SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and
manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the
instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone
must support the SMS exchange function through
Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu,
and then select “SMS Reader” using the arrow keys on the
steering wheel controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10 SMS
messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing
call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the
Phone main screen.
CONNECT OR DISCONNECT LINK BETWEEN
THE UCONNECT PHONE AND MOBILE PHONE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½-inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
FAR END AUDIO PERFORMANCE
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/
RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages, which
displays vehicle information related to the drivetrain,
transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the
touchscreen, and then select Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the three
selectable page options. It provides information for the
following items:
Transfer Case Status
Latitude/Longitude
Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees.The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Offroad+ Status
3 — Latitude/Longitude
4 — Altitude
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch
increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/USB/
AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the left rocker
switch is nonfunctional.
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Battery Voltage
4 — Oil Pressure
5 — Transmission Temperature
(Automatic Transmission Only)
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel, below
the climate controls. Behind the media hub access door,
the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a Type C USB port
and one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow you to
play music from MP3 players/smartphones or USB
devices through the vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in “Media Mode” in
“Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section or in the Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up
will appear and allow you to select the device transfer-
ring data.
Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to only charge USB devices.
Depending on your vehicle’s specifications, the USB port
may contain playback capabilities and will allow you to
play music from your smartphone device or USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
A third and fourth USB port are located behind the center
console, above the power inverter. Both ports are charge
only.
USB (Charge Only) On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the USB
ports, the following message will display depending on the
device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device”.
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result
in a collision.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
JEEP® WIRELESS SPEAKER -
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless Bluetooth®
speaker.
Getting To Know Your Speaker
Speaker Buttons
Rear Speaker Outlets
Jeep® Wireless Speaker Location
Wireless Speaker Location
The Jeep® wireless speaker is located behind the right
rear passenger seat. In order to access the Jeep® wireless
speaker, the seat will need to be folded down or tilted
forward.
To remove the Jeep® wireless speaker, pull on the strap
located on top of the mount for the speaker. When the
strap is pulled, the Jeep® wireless speaker can easily be
lifted from the mount.
When placing the Jeep® wireless speaker back in the
mount, simply put the speaker back in the mount.
1 — Power ON/OFF
2 — Bluetooth®/App Pairing
3 — Play/Pause
4 — Volume Down/Skip Back
5 — Voice Control/Call Control
6 — Volume Up/Skip Forward
1 — Reset Button
2 — Battery Status Button
3 — Service/Diagnostic Port (Non-charging, Non-custom-
er use port)
4 — Type A USB Charging Port
5 — Battery Status LED
6 — Speaker Charging Port
7 — Aux Port
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
Placement of the Wireless Speaker
Then push/rotate forward on the front of the speaker until
the speaker locks in place.
Rotating the Wireless Speaker
Charging External Devices
The Jeep® wireless speaker is capable of charging most
USB enabled smartphones and tablets using the type A
USB charging port.
To use the external charging feature:
1. Turn the speaker on.
2. Plug the USB power cable into the type A USB
charging port on the back of the speaker.
3. Insert the other end of the USB power cable into your
device to immediately begin charging.
Charging The Speaker
Before using the Jeep® wireless speaker for the first time,
fully charge your Jeep® wireless speaker until the battery
indicator light stays solid green.
The Jeep® wireless speaker in-vehicle dock is the most
ideal way to fully charge the speaker with the ignition in
ON/RUN or ACC. The speaker can also be charged with a
power adapter.
NOTE:
Jeep® wireless speaker will not charge within vehicle dock
while the ignition is fully off.
To charge the Jeep® wireless speaker with a power
adapter, insert the power adapter into a wall outlet. Next,
plug the power adapter into the Jeep® wireless speaker
charging port on the back of the speaker.
NOTE:
Power adapter needed for the Jeep® wireless speaker has
to have a range of 14VDC to 16.5VDC, with a minimum of
2.7A and a barrel connector dimension of 5.5mm by
2.5mm. Power adapter is not included.
NOTE:
The Jeep® wireless speaker must be turned on to observe
the Battery Status LED.
Monitoring Battery Level Status LED Light
Red 40% or lower
Yellow 40% to 70%
Green 70% to 100%
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
Operating Temperature
The Jeep® wireless speaker contains a lithium-ion
rechargeable battery. Typical charging temperatures for
these types of batteries are from 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C).
NOTE:
The functions described are for when the Jeep® wireless
speaker is undocked from the vehicle. When plugged into
the docking station, the Jeep® wireless speaker functions
as part of the vehicle’s sound system.
Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is the ability for
the Jeep® wireless speaker to connect to devices using
Bluetooth®. Follow these simple steps to connect a
Bluetooth® enabled device to the Jeep® wireless
speaker:
1. Press and hold the power button for 2-3 seconds to
turn the Jeep® wireless speaker on.
2. Turn “on” Bluetooth® for the device you desire to be
connected to the Jeep® wireless speaker. For
instructions on how to turn on and off Bluetooth®
settings for the desired device, refer to the device’s
user manual.
3. When powered on, the Jeep® wireless speaker will
automatically enter pairing mode. To pair a second
device, press and hold the Bluetooth® button for 2-3
seconds, until an audio cue is heard. Then go to the
device’s Bluetooth® settings and select “Jeep®
Speaker” from the list.
The Jeep® wireless speaker will remember the last eight
devices it has paired with.
NOTE:
If the Jeep® wireless speaker is left on with an inactive
Bluetooth® connection for 30 minutes, it will automati-
cally turn off. The Jeep® wireless speaker can be turned
on again by pressing and holding the power button for 2-3
seconds.
Resetting Your Jeep® Wireless Speaker
To reset the Jeep® wireless speaker to its original factory
setting, press and hold the reset button under the back
cover for 8-10 seconds.
Speakerphone
The speakerphone feature can be used by pressing the
“Voice Control” button on the Jeep® wireless speaker.
This feature can be used to answer and end calls over the
speakerphone.
Volume And Playback Control
Volume can be increased or decreased by briefly pressing
the + button or - button. When the maximum volume is
reached, an audio cue will sound.
To skip to the next track, press and hold the + button. To
go to the previous track, press the - button.
Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is being able to
pair two Jeep® wireless speakers together for Qualcomm
TrueWireless™ Stereo. This feature allows for two Jeep®
wireless speakers to play left and right stereo sound.
Temperature <-4°F(< -20°C)
-4 to 32°F
(< -20 to 0°C)
32 to 113°F
(0 to 45°C)
115 to 140°F
(46 to 60°C)
>140°F(>60°C)
Speaker state
(docked or Direct Current [DC] plugged in)
Off On On On Off
Speaker state (undocked and running off battery) Off On On On Off
Speaker’s Internal Battery Charging No No Yes No No
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
Here are the steps needed for Qualcomm TrueWireless™
Stereo:
1. Push and hold the power button on both Jeep®
wireless speakers until both speakers turn on.
2. Place both speakers into Qualcomm TrueWireless™
Stereo pairing mode. This can be achieved by
pressing and holding the Battery Status button on
both speakers until an audio notification is heard
from both speakers.
3. Connect one of the Jeep® wireless speakers to the
Bluetooth® source. Refer to previous section “Phone
& Bluetooth® Pairing” for additional information.
4. Once the Jeep® wireless speaker is connected to the
Bluetooth® device, audio will be played from both
speakers.
NOTE:
While in Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo mode, the
volume will not have independent speaker control.
Pushing the Up or Down Volume button on either Jeep®
wireless speaker will affect the audio output on both, as
well as volume adjustments on the Bluetooth® device.
Waterproof Features
The Jeep® wireless speaker is IP67 waterproof certified
with design in mind to withstand rainfall, waterjets,
splashing or submerged in up to 3ft (1m) of water for up to
30 minutes.
Warnings, Caution & Legal Information
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose
the Jeep® wireless speaker to rain or moisture while
charging. The Jeep® wireless speaker should not be
exposed to dripping or splashing, and objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on or near it
while being charged or charging other devices. As with any
electronic products, use care not to spill liquids into any
part of the product. Liquids can cause a failure and/or a
fire hazard. The power supply must be used indoors only.
Make no modifications to the product or accessories.
Unauthorized alterations may compromise safety,
regulatory compliance, and system performance, and will
void the warranty. Do not place any flame sources, such as
lighted candles, on or near the Jeep® wireless speaker.
The Jeep® wireless speaker contains small parts that may
be a choking hazard and is not suitable for children under
age 3. Do not continue charging the battery if it does not
reach full charge within the specified charging time.
Overcharging may cause the battery to become hot,
rupture, or ignite. If you see any heat deformation or
leakage, properly dispose of the battery. Do not attempt to
charge the battery in temperatures outside the range of
32°- 104°F (0° - 40°C). If the battery begins to leak, do
not allow the liquid to come in contact with your skin or
eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area
with plenty of water and seek medical attention
immediately. Do not expose the Jeep® wireless speaker or
battery to excessive heat, including direct sunlight or fire.
Do not store or use inside cars in hot weather, where it can
be exposed to temperatures in excess of 115°F (60°C).
Doing so may cause the battery and power supply to
generate heat, rupture, or ignite. Using the Jeep® wireless
speaker in this manner also may result in a loss of
performance and a shortened life expectancy. Extended
exposure to direct sunlight may damage the external
appearance and material qualities. Do not step on, throw,
or drop batteries or the power supply or device, or expose
them to a strong shock. Do not pierce, crush, dent, or
deform the batteries or power supply in any way. If either
becomes deformed, properly dispose of it. Do not
short-circuit batteries. Do not attempt to service the
Jeep® wireless speaker yourself. Opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other
hazards and will void the manufacturer’s warranty. To
prevent risk of fire or electric shock, avoid overloading wall
outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience
receptacles. Your Bluetooth® device (mobile phone,
music player, tablet, laptop, etc.) must support the A2DP
Bluetooth® profile in order to work wirelessly with your
Jeep® wireless speaker. The A2DP profile is supported by
most recent mobile products with built-in Bluetooth®
capability. Please refer to your device’s user manual for
details and instruction regarding the Bluetooth® profiles it
supports. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION!
Ensure the Jeep Wireless Speaker is prepared for use in
wet environments by removing all cable connections
and making sure all port covers are sealed tightly. If the
cover is not secured properly, the Jeep Wireless
Speaker may sustain water damage.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
Jeep® follows Safety Instruction for CE- LV. Do not operate
products in temperatures outside the range of -5 to 40 °C.
Operating Frequency Band: 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
Maximum RF power: 6 dBm EIRP. Do not install this
equipment in a confined space or building, such as a
bookcase or similar unit that is not well-ventilated. The
ventilation should not be impeded by covering the
ventilation openings with items such as newspaper,
table-cloths, curtains etc.
NOTE:
Please refer to the information on the bottom of the Jeep®
wireless speaker for electrical and safety information
before installing or operating the Jeep® wireless speaker.
Directive 2014/53/EU Article 10 Obligations of
Manufacturers
2. Manufacturers shall ensure that radio equipment shall
be so constructed that it can be operated in at least one
Member State without infringing applicable requirements
on the use of radio spectrum.
10. In cases of restrictions on putting in to service or of
requirements for authorization of use, information
available on the packaging shall allow the identification of
the Member States or the geographical area within a
Member State where restrictions on putting into service or
requirements for authorization of use exist. The
Commission may adopt implementing acts specifying how
to present that information. Those implementing acts
shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory
procedure referred to in Article 45 (2).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by FCA US LLC is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. The
apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing
and that objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall
not be placed on apparatus.
WARNING!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type. If the
battery or battery pack is exposed to excessive heat or
fire, personal injury may occur.
CAUTION!
If needed, Jeep wireless speaker should be cleaned
using a damp cloth and water. Do not use alkaline
products like soap or abrasive chemicals to clean the
Jeep wireless speaker as it could cause damage to it.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced
radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3,
Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
in the middle console above the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands can be given at any point while
using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen for Uconnect 3 radio and above the main
menu bar for Uconnect 4C/4C Nav radios.
RADIO
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to
learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say
“
Help”. The system provides you with a list of commands.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media
Functions. For 8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Begin
Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® and
auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist/
album/song/genre.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to iPod®”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the
Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of
the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
PHONE
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready to make a phone
call. You may have to wait for a few more moments to
issue a Voice Command for hands-free calling. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions (for US and Canadian residents).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel or Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button on
the steering wheel or Phone button and say “
Call”,
then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers,
you can say “
Call John Smith work/home/cell/etc.”
VOICE TEXT REPLY
Uconnect announces
incoming text messages. Push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say
“
Listen”. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system).
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the VR button
or Phone button (if enabled).
After the beep, say: “
Reply
”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow
the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of
the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit Uconnect-
Phone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone’s® User Manual.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
CLIMATE — IF EQUIPPED
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for climate may only be used to adjust the
interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will
not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (if
equipped).
NAVIGATION (4C NAV) — IF EQUIPPED
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when the system shows you
exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button on the
steering wheel. After the beep, say: “
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan” or enter
State.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push the VR
button . After the beep, say: “
Find nearest coffee
shop”.
SIRI® EYES FREE
Available on iPhone® 4s and later
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages,
schedule meetings, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand
what you mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone®. Pair your
Siri-enabled device to your Uconnect System. Push and
hold, then
release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other useful
requests.
USING DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do Not
Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message will be
seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s™ best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your
smartphone’s data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one
of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the Microphone icon
within Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to “Android Auto™” in “Media Mode” in the
“Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section or the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 6.0 or
higher and download app on Google Play. Android™,
Android Auto™, and Google Play are trademarks of Google
Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY® — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Refer to "Apple Carplay®" in "Media Mode" in "Uconnect 4
with 7-inch Display" section or in the Uconnect Owner's
Manual Supplement for further information
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of
Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
MULTIMEDIA 365
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science, and Economic Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
9
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
IN MEXICO CONTACT
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 367
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
I
SLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to
provide additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection
Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the
service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html for
further information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
10
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 283
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).......... 175
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 258
Adding Fuel................................................................... 197
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 284
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 132
Air Bag Warning Light .................................... 130
, 132
Enhanced Accident Response ......................139
, 243
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 243
Front Air Bag .................................................. 131
, 132
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 138
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 137
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 140
Maintenance........................................................... 140
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 130
Transporting Pets.................................................... 150
Air Bag Light ........................................................ 130
, 151
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 252
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 254
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 254
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 254
Air Conditioning ...............................................................47
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 48
, 254
Air Conditioning System..................................................47
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................48
Air Filter......................................................................... 252
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................................... 270
Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System ................................................... 19
Security Alarm............................................................ 19
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................................10
Android Auto..................................................................364
Android Auto™
b
........................................................339
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 258
, 286
Disposal ...................................................................259
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................107
Apple CarPlay ................................................................364
Apple CarPlay® Integration
b
...................................341
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................111
Audio Settings ...............................................................336
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................289
Auto Down Power Windows............................................49
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................................34
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................23
Automatic Headlights .....................................................36
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 47
Automatic Transmission...............................................160
Adding Fluid .............................................................262
Autostick ..................................................................163
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................262
Fluid Change............................................................262
Fluid Level Check .......................................... 261
, 262
Fluid Type....................................................... 261
, 288
Gear Ranges ............................................................161
Special Additives .....................................................262
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ............... 163
AUX ................................................................................354
Aux Mode ...................................................................... 338
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 79
Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 79
Auxiliary Switches........................................................... 81
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 288
Axle Lock....................................................................... 166
B
Battery...........................................................................250
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 151
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................114
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone..................................350
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing ...........................................347
Bluetooth Mode............................................................ 339
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 255
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 267
Brake Assist System.....................................................108
Brake Control System .................................................. 108
Brake Fluid...........................................................260
, 288
Brake System ......................................................260
, 283
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................283
Fluid Check.............................................................. 260
Master Cylinder .......................................................260
Parking..................................................................... 156
11
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 160
Bulb Replacement ..............................................219
, 220
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 152
, 219
Bumper End Cap Removal .......................................... 209
C
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 194
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 286
Caps, Filler
Fuel.......................................................................... 197
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 249
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 259
Car Washes .................................................................. 277
Carbon Monoxide Warning................................. 151
, 285
Carpeting ...................................................................... 280
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 359
Center High Mounted Stop Light................................. 222
Certification Label........................................................ 198
Chains, Tire................................................................... 274
Changing A Flat Tire ..................................................... 262
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 264
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 150
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 150
Child Restraint.............................................................. 141
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 143
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 149
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 147
Infant And Child Restraints.................................... 142
Locating The LATCH Anchorages........................... 146
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 144
Older Children And Child Restraints...................... 142
Seating Positions.................................................... 144
Clean Air Gasoline........................................................ 284
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................273
Climate Control
Automatic................................................................... 43
Cold Weather Operation...............................................155
Connector
UCI ............................................................................354
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).......................354
Console............................................................................ 77
Floor ........................................................................... 77
Contract, Service ..........................................................367
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................259
Cooling System .............................................................257
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................258
Coolant Level ...........................................................259
Cooling Capacity......................................................286
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................259
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................258
Inspection ...................................................... 258
, 259
Points To Remember...............................................259
Pressure Cap ...........................................................259
Radiator Cap............................................................259
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 258
, 286, 287
Corrosion Protection.....................................................277
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................................175
Customer Assistance....................................................366
Cybersecurity ................................................................289
D
Daytime Running Lights ................................................. 36
Dealer Service...............................................................251
Defroster, Windshield...................................................151
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers............................................ 39
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 36
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 250
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................................ 241
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 259
Disturb........................................................................... 349
Do Not Disturb .............................................................. 363
Door Frame..................................................................... 67
Installation................................................................. 67
Removal..................................................................... 67
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................................. 23
Doors............................................................................... 20
Removal.............................................................. 24
, 26
Removal, Front.......................................................... 24
Removal, Rear........................................................... 26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt............................................. 27
, 28
Driving ........................................................................... 208
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 108
Anti-Lock Brake System..........................................107
Electronic Roll Mitigation...............................108
, 113
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................................. 35
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..................... 79
Electrical Power Outlets................................................. 79
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................173
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 109
Emergency
In Case Of ................................................................215
SOS Emergency Call................................................215
Emergency Brake ......................................................... 156
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
371
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking............................................................229
, 262
Jump Starting.......................................................... 236
Tow Hooks............................................................... 242
Engine........................................................................... 249
Air Cleaner............................................................... 252
Block Heater ........................................................... 155
Break-In Recommendations .................................. 156
Compartment.......................................................... 249
Compartment Identification................................... 249
Coolant (Antifreeze)................................................ 287
Cooling..................................................................... 257
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................................... 151
, 285
Fails To Start ........................................................... 155
Flooded, Starting .................................................... 155
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 286
Jump Starting.......................................................... 236
Oil...........................................................251
, 286, 287
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 249
Oil Filter ................................................................... 252
Oil Reset .....................................................................92
Oil Selection ................................................... 251
, 286
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 251
Overheating............................................................. 239
Starting.................................................................... 153
Engine Oil Viscosity ...................................................... 251
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart............................................ 251
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 139
, 243
Ethanol.......................................................................... 284
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................................... 151
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 285
Exhaust System................................................... 151
, 257
Exterior Lights........................................................ 36
, 152
F
Fabric Care....................................................................278
Fabric Top......................................................................278
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................252
Air Conditioning ................................................48
, 254
Engine Oil....................................................... 252
, 287
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................252
Flashers
Hazard Warning.......................................................215
Turn Signal...............................................................152
Turn Signals.............................................................221
Flash-To-Pass .................................................................. 36
Flooded Engine Starting...............................................155
Fluid Capacities ............................................................286
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................152
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission..............................................261
Fluid Level Checks........................................................260
Brake........................................................................260
Engine Oil.................................................................250
Fluid, Brake...................................................................288
Fluids And Lubricants...................................................287
Fog Lights......................................................................221
Fog Lights, Service........................................................221
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................27
Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 29
Folding Windshield ......................................................... 69
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................117
Four Wheel Drive ..........................................................164
Operation .................................................................164
Shifting.....................................................................164
System .....................................................................164
Four-Way Hazard Flasher............................................. 215
Freedom Panels ............................................................. 64
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................................... 240
Front Axle (Differential) ................................................260
Front Door Removal ...................................................... 24
Fuel................................................................................284
Adding...................................................................... 197
Additives .................................................................. 284
Clean Air ..................................................................284
Ethanol..................................................................... 284
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ................................................197
Gasoline................................................................... 284
Materials Added...................................................... 284
Methanol .................................................................284
Octane Rating.................................................284
, 287
Requirements.......................................................... 286
Specifications.......................................................... 287
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 286
Fueling .......................................................................... 197
Fuses............................................................................. 222
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 73
Garage Door Opener (Homelink®) — If Equipped
b
.... 73
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ....................................197
, 198
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 284
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................284
Gasoline, Reformulated ...............................................284
Gear Ranges ........................................................158
, 161
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 282
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ....................................... 199
GVWR ............................................................................ 198
11
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372
H
Hard Top ..........................................................................50
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................................ 215
Head Restraints ..............................................................31
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................................36
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 220
Cleaning................................................................... 277
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......................36
Lights On Reminder...................................................37
Passing .......................................................................36
Replacing................................................................. 220
Heated Mirrors ................................................................35
Heated Steering Wheel...................................................33
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ...........36
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 111
Hitches
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 201
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................73
Hood Prop........................................................................71
Hood Release ..................................................................71
I
Ignition.............................................................................14
Switch .........................................................................14
In Case Of Emergency.................................................. 215
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ....................................................11
Inside Rearview Mirror....................................................34
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Reset.........................................................92
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 282
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)............................... 223
Interior And Instrument Lights .......................................38
Interior Appearance Care .............................................279
Interior Lights.................................................................. 38
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ............................... 39
Introduction....................................................................... 8
Inverter
Power ......................................................................... 80
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................................338
J
Jack Location ................................................................230
Jack Operation .................................................... 233
, 262
Jacking Instructions......................................................233
Jump Starting................................................................236
K
Key Fob
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System ................................................... 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)............ 14
Key-In Reminder .............................................................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go......................................................... 21
Passive Entry .............................................................21
Keys................................................................................. 12
Replacement ...................................................... 14
, 18
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................ 37
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................125
Latches..........................................................................152
Hood........................................................................... 71
Leaks, Fluid...................................................................152
Life Of Tires ...................................................................271
Light Bulbs...........................................................152
, 219
Lights............................................................................. 152
Air Bag.............................................................130
, 151
Automatic Headlights ............................................... 36
Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 110
Bulb Replacement ..................................................220
Center Mounted Stop ............................................. 222
Daytime Running....................................................... 36
Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 36
Exterior.............................................................. 36
, 152
Fog ...........................................................................221
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................215
Headlights................................................................220
High Beam................................................................. 36
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 36
Interior ....................................................................... 38
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 37
Passing ...................................................................... 36
Rear Servicing ......................................................... 221
Rear Tail Lamps ...................................................... 221
Service ..................................................................... 220
Side Marker............................................................. 221
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........................119
Traction Control.......................................................110
Turn Signal...............................................................152
Turn Signals............................................................. 221
Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 198
Tires .........................................................................267
Locking
Axle...........................................................................166
Locks
Automatic Door ......................................................... 23
Child Protection......................................................... 23
Power Door ................................................................ 20
Low Tire Pressure System............................................ 119
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
373
Lowering The Soft Top
b
......................................50, 54
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 255
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 283
Luggage Carrier...............................................................87
M
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 250
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 244
Manual
Park Release........................................................... 239
Service..................................................................... 368
Manual Transmission ......................................... 157
, 261
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 261
Lubricant Selection........................................ 261
, 288
Shift Speeds............................................................ 158
Methanol ...................................................................... 284
Mirrors .............................................................................34
Automatic Dimming ...................................................34
Electric Powered ........................................................35
Electric Remote..........................................................35
Heated........................................................................35
Outside .......................................................................35
Rearview.....................................................................34
Vanity..........................................................................35
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 119
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 367
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ....................................... 156
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................123
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).......................... 284
, 287
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................252
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................252
Oil Reset ..........................................................................92
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 251
, 287
Capacity ...................................................................286
Change Interval .......................................................251
Dipstick ....................................................................250
Disposal ...................................................................252
Filter ............................................................... 252
, 287
Filter Disposal..........................................................252
Identification Logo...................................................251
Materials Added To .................................................251
Recommendation.......................................... 251
, 286
Synthetic ..................................................................251
Viscosity ......................................................... 251
, 286
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.................................................. 9
, 368
Outside Rearview Mirrors...............................................35
Overheating, Engine .....................................................239
P
Paint Care......................................................................277
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
b
...345
Pairing A Phone ¹ ..........................................................327
Parking Brake ...............................................................156
ParkSense System, Rear..............................................186
Passive Entry................................................................... 21
Pets................................................................................150
Placard, Tire And Loading Information........................267
Power
Brakes......................................................................283
Door Locks................................................................. 20
Inverter ...................................................................... 80
Mirrors ....................................................................... 35
Steering ................................................................... 168
Windows .................................................................... 49
Power Steering Fluid .................................................... 288
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................128
Preparation For Jacking ............................................... 232
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................................128
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................................. 270
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ......................... 259
Radio
Presets..................................................................... 333
Radio Operation ..................................................332
, 359
Raising The Soft Top ¹.................................................... 57
Rear Axle (Differential)................................................. 260
Rear Camera................................................................. 194
Rear Cross Path............................................................ 116
Rear Door Removal ¹ ..................................................... 26
Rear ParkSense System .............................................. 186
Recreational Towing..................................................... 206
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................. 207
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ............. 208
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................284
Refrigerant.................................................................... 254
Release, Hood ................................................................ 71
Reminder, Seat Belt ..................................................... 124
11
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374
Remote Control
Starting System..........................................................16
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................................19
Disarm The Alarm ......................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................14
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...................... 353
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................................17
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........17
Uconnect Settings......................................................17
Remote Starting System.................................................16
Removable Doors.....................................................24
, 26
Front ...........................................................................24
Rear ............................................................................26
Removing The Soft Top
b
............................................59
Replacement Bulbs...................................................... 219
Replacement Keys ...................................................14
, 18
Replacement Tires ....................................................... 272
Reporting Safety Defects............................................. 368
Restraints, Child........................................................... 141
Restraints, Head .............................................................31
Roll Over Warning .............................................................9
Roof Type Carrier ............................................................87
Rotation, Tires .............................................................. 274
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................................... 151
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................................... 152
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 368
Safety Information, Tire ............................................... 263
Safety Tips .................................................................... 150
Safety, Exhaust Gas..................................................... 151
Schedule, Maintenance............................................... 244
Seat Belts............................................................ 124
, 151
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................127
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..................127
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..........127
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........................128
Child Restraints .......................................................141
Energy Management Feature.................................128
Extender...................................................................127
Front Seat ............................................. 124
, 125, 126
Inspection ................................................................151
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................126
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................127
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................................125
Operating Instructions.............................................126
Pregnant Women.....................................................128
Pretensioners ..........................................................128
Rear Seat .................................................................125
Reminder .................................................................124
Seat Belt Extender...................................................127
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................128
Untwisting Procedure..............................................127
Seat Belts Maintenance...............................................281
Seats................................................................................ 27
Adjustment................................................................. 27
Height Adjustment.....................................................28
Rear Folding............................................................... 27
Tilting.......................................................................... 27
Security Alarm.................................................................19
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System ................................................... 19
Selec - Speed Control ...................................................112
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).................................287
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................................18
Sentry Key Replacement......................................... 14
, 18
Service Assistance........................................................366
Service Contract ........................................................... 367
Service Manuals...........................................................368
Shifting..........................................................................159
Automatic Transmission................................159
, 160
Manual Transmission ............................................. 157
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)..........................................................207
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ................................................ 208
Shoulder Belts .............................................................. 125
Side Step Removal.......................................................208
Signals, Turn........................................................152
, 221
Siri ................................................................................. 363
Sirius Satellite Radio.................................................... 333
Favorites .................................................................. 334
Replay ...................................................................... 334
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................335
Favorites .................................................................. 334
Replay ...................................................................... 334
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 274
Snow Tires .................................................................... 273
Soft Top.................................................................... 50
, 56
Soft Top Windows........................................................... 56
Spare Tires...........................................................231
, 273
Spark Plugs................................................................... 287
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................................................ 287
Oil ............................................................................. 287
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................................................. 174
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)........................................... 178
Cancel ......................................................................175
Resume....................................................................175
Speed Control (Cruise Control)...........................173
, 175
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
375
Starting ......................................................................... 153
Automatic Transmission......................................... 153
Button.........................................................................14
Cold Weather .......................................................... 155
Engine Block Heater............................................... 155
Engine Fails To Start............................................... 155
Manual Transmission ............................................. 153
Remote.......................................................................16
Starting And Operating ................................................ 153
Starting Procedures ..................................................... 153
Steering ...........................................................................33
Power....................................................................... 168
Tilt Column .................................................................33
Wheel, Heated ...........................................................33
Wheel, Tilt...................................................................33
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................... 353
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls..... 353
Stop/Start............................................................ 169
, 171
Storage .....................................................................56
, 77
Storage, Vehicle .................................................... 48
, 276
Store Radio Presets ..................................................... 333
Storing Your Vehicle..................................................... 276
Stuck, Freeing .............................................................. 240
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic................................................................. 167
Sway Control, Trailer .................................................... 113
Synthetic Engine Oil ..................................................... 251
System, Remote Starting................................................16
T
Tailgate ............................................................................72
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................33
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)..........................47
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................33
Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................267
Tire Markings ................................................................263
Tire Safety Information.................................................263
Tires...................................................152
, 269, 273, 275
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................................271
Air Pressure..............................................................269
Chains ......................................................................274
Changing ........................................................ 229
, 262
General Information...................................... 269
, 273
High Speed ..............................................................270
Inflation Pressure ....................................................270
Jacking .....................................................................262
Life Of Tires..............................................................271
Load Capacity ................................................ 267
, 268
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .....................119
Quality Grading ........................................................275
Radial .......................................................................270
Replacement ...........................................................272
Rotation....................................................................274
Safety ............................................................. 263
, 269
Sizes .........................................................................264
Snow Tires................................................................273
Spare Tires..................................................... 231
, 273
Spinning ...................................................................271
Tread Wear Indicators.............................................271
Wheel Nut Torque....................................................283
To Open Hood ................................................................. 71
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .....................................203
Top
Dual ............................................................................ 50
Hard............................................................................ 50
Removable................................................................. 50
Soft .............................................................................50
Tow Hooks
Emergency...............................................................242
Towing ........................................................ 199
, 201, 241
Disabled Vehicle...................................................... 241
Recreational ............................................................ 206
Weight...................................................................... 201
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 206
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle..................................................................165
Traction Control............................................................ 113
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...........................................113
Trailer Towing ...............................................................199
Cooling System Tips................................................205
Hitches..................................................................... 201
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............................201
, 203
Wiring....................................................................... 204
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 201
Trailer Weight................................................................201
Transfer Case ...............................................................261
Fluid .........................................................................288
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ................................... 164
Maintenance ...........................................................261
Transmission ................................................................ 160
Automatic .......................................................160
, 261
Fluid .........................................................................288
Maintenance ...........................................................261
Manual..................................................................... 157
Shifting..................................................................... 159
Transporting Pets .........................................................150
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................271
Turn Signals..................................................................221
11
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376
U
UCI Connector .............................................................. 354
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity................................ 350
Phone Call Features ............................................... 348
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................................ 350
Uconnect Settings......................................................17
Uconnect Phone............................... 344
, 345, 346, 347
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress.................................. 349
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress............................ 349
Bluetooth Communication Link ............................. 351
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ....................... 348
Call Continuation ........................................... 331
, 350
Call Controls............................................................ 348
Call Termination...................................................... 350
Cancel Command ................................................... 345
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone.................................. 350
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing ................................ 347
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device......................... 347
Dial By Saying A Number........................................ 348
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device............... 347
Far End Audio Performance ................................... 351
Help Command ....................................................... 345
Join Calls ................................................................. 350
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 347
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ..................................................... 349
Managing Your Favorites ........................................348
Natural Speech........................................................344
Operation .................................................................344
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone....345
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..............346
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ...............................346
Phonebook Download.............................................347
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................349
Power-Up..................................................................351
Recent Calls.............................................................349
Redial .......................................................................350
To Remove A Favorite .............................................348
Toggling Between Calls...........................................349
Touch-Tone Number Entry ......................................348
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..............350
Voice Command ......................................................350
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call .................................348
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features................... 17
, 21
Passive Entry Programming......................................21
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................275
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector..........354
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................127
USB................................................................................354
V
Vanity Mirrors.................................................................. 35
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................283
Vehicle Loading................................................... 198
, 268
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................. 10
Vehicle Storage......................................................48
, 276
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help .......................................................... 11
Navigation.................................................................. 11
Operating Instructions .............................................. 11
Searching User Guide............................................... 11
Viscosity, Engine Oil ..................................................... 251
Voice Command ........................................................... 360
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...................................360
W
Warnings And Cautions.................................................. 10
Warnings, Roll Over...........................................................9
Warranty Information ................................................... 367
Washers, Windshield ................................................... 250
Washing Vehicle ........................................................... 277
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ......................................... 273
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.......................................... 273
Wind Buffeting................................................................ 50
Window Fogging ............................................................. 48
Window Lockout Switch ................................................. 49
Window Storage ............................................................. 56
Windows.......................................................................... 49
Power ......................................................................... 49
Windshield
Folding ....................................................................... 69
Windshield Defroster ...................................................151
Windshield Washers ............................................. 38
, 250
Fluid .........................................................................250
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 255
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 38
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................255
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident.
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Fifth Edition V3
20_JT_OM_EN_USC_N2
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
U. S.
mopar.com/om
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play®
Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
